MCS Operations Manual (Java Edition) PDF NEC Medical Center System Java Edition

NEAX2400 Medical Center System Operations Manual (Java Edition) NEAX2400 Medical Center System Operations Manual (Java Edition)

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 218

DownloadMCS Operations Manual (Java Edition) PDF NEC Medical Center System Java Edition
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
MEDICAL CENTER SYSTEM
OPERATIONS MANUAL
(JAVA Edition)

NEC America, Inc.
NDA-30026
Revision 6
August, 2000
Stock # 241739

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications,
functions, or features, at any time, without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for the exclusive use
of its employees and customers. The information contained herein is
the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval from NEC America, Inc.
NEAX and Dtermare registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
© 2000 NEC America, Inc.
Printed in the USA

All other brand or product names are or may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of, and are used to identify products or
services of, their respective owners.
MS-DOS, Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft Windows 95 and
Microsoft Windows 98 are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

Chapter 1 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What is Medical Center System?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telnet and JAVA Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option/Command Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Key Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
2
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
7

Chapter 2 - SERVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Number Attendant Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Step 1: Superuser/ Root Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Step 2: MCS Login Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Step 3: MCS Installation Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Step 4: Informix Database Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Step 5: Jmcmp Server Software Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Step 6: Java Server/Client Component Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Application Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Step 1: Application Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Step 2: Monitor Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Step 3: Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Step 4: Recluster Primary Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Step 5: Host Statistics Primary Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Step 6: Cleaner Primary Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Step 7: Java Services Primary Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Step 8: Mcs_Dbclean Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Step 9: Mcs_Recluster Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Step 10: Mcs_Host_ Statistics Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Database Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
MCSCFG Database Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
MAT Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Attendant Station Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
To Configure Attendant Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Chapter 3 - JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installing the JAVA MCS Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 4 - TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page i

CONTENTS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Page
Screen Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Operator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destination Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type of Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Line Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancel and Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parked Call Retrieval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieve from Idle Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Call Abandon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancel and Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisor Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisor Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44
45
46
47
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
52
52
53
53
53
54
55
55
56
56
56
57
57
57
58
58
58
59
59
60
61
61
61
62
62
63
63
63
63

Chapter 5 - JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Operator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destination Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page ii

65
66
68
68
70
70
72
72

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

CONTENTS

Page
Directory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type of Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Failures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieve Parked Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieve from Idle Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Call Abandon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call a Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

73
74
74
74
74
75
75
75
76
76
77
78
80
81
81
82
83

Chapter 6 - DATABASE ADMINISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Types of Database Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Extension Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
View Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Screen Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Database Entry and Exit Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Database Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Add a Record / Admit a Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Delete a Record/ Discharge a Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Modify a Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
View Database Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Print Database Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Database Record Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Patients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Physicians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Employees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Attendant Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Other Internal Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tests / Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
External Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Trunk Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Beeper Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Emergencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Chapter 7 - SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RSC Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-30026 Revision 6

105
105
106
107

Page iii

CONTENTS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Page
PBX Restriction Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Affected Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Extension Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pop-up Window Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Empty Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Range Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Record Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Extension Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Extension Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patient DID Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DID Number Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“Stamped” Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Patient DID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Patient DID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Patient DID Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Patient DID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outstanding RSC Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outstanding RSC Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resend an RSC Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete an RSC Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Outstanding RSC Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Outstanding RSC Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outstanding DID Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outstanding DID Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resend a DID Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a DID Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Outstanding DID Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Outstanding DID Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

107
107
108
109
109
109
110
110
110
110
110
111
112
112
112
114
115
115
116
116
118
118
120
120
121
121
121
122
122
123
124
125
127
128
128
128
129
130
131
133
134
134
134
135
136
137
138
140

Chapter 8 - CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Page iv

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

CONTENTS

Page
Displayed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Chapter 9 - LOGIN NAME MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Option Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145
146
146
146

Chapter 10 - SUPERVISOR REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Date-Stamped Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Operator Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Chapter 11 - PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chapter 12 - PLATFORM MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Introduction to Platform Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence of Option Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Database Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Database Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drop Database Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Database Indexes Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erase Database Indexes Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rebuild Database Indexes Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Menu Colors Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Representative Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Record Count Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View TTY File Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-30026 Revision 6

165
165
166
166
166
167
167
167
168
169
169
169
170
170
170
171
171
171
172
172
172
173
173
173
174
174
175
177
178
178
179
179

Page v

CONTENTS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Page
FLF/RCF Download to PBX Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effect on Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

180
180
180
180
180

Chapter 13 - HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Copy Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Log File Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erase Log File Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialization and Termination Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statistics Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardcopy Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

181
181
181
182
182
183
183
183
183
184
184
185
185
185
186
186
187
189
189
189
189

Appendix A - BEEPER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using the Beeper Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Local Pager Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dial Number Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Error and User Interface Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Page vi

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

FIGURES

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure

Title

1-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9

Medical Center System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Super User Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Example Install Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MCS Installation Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Informix Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Jmcmp Pre-Install - 1st Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Jmcmp Pre-Install - Install Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Jmcmp Pre-Install - Upgrade Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Jmcmp Pre-Install - Overwrite Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Jmcmp Installation - Access to Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Jmcmp Installation - Initial Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Jmcmp Installation - Upgrade Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Jmcmp Installation - Overwrite Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Jmcmp Installation - Overwrite APM Application Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Allowable Client Connections Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Allowable Client Connections Configuration File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Jmcmp Installation - Installation Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MCS Login Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
NEC UNIX OAI Applications Installation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Java Virtual Machine option dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Searching for VMs dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installing Application progress indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Welcome dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installing Files progress indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation Complete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Password Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Screen Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Operator Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Patient Caller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Internal Staff or Non-Patient Caller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Incoming From an External Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Directory Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Call Park Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Parked Call Retrieval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Beeper Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Redial Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Emergency Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Password Entry Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
JAVA MCS Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Operator Screen - Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Operator Screen - Call Source Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Operator Screen - Call Destination Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Operator Screen - Directory Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Park Caller Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Parked Caller Time-out Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Answer a Park Recall Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page

Page vii

FIGURES

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Figure

Title

5-10
5-11
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
8-1
9-1
9-2
10-1
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
12-10

Parked Call Retrieval Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Beeper Function Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Database Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Record Field and Command Line Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Add a Record/Admit a Patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Delete a Record/Discharge a Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Modify a Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
View Database Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Print Database Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Restriction Class Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Extension Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Record Field and Command Line Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Add an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Delete an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Modify an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
View Extension Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Print Extension Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Patient DID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Add Patient DID Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Delete Patient DID Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
View Patient DID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Print Patient DID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Outstanding RSC Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Resend Outstanding RSC Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Delete Outstanding RSC Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
View Outstanding RSC Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Print Outstanding RSC Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Outstanding DID Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Resend Outstanding DID Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Delete Outstanding DID Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
View Outstanding DID Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Print Outstanding DID Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Platform Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Login Name Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
View Operator Login Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Supervisor Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Platform Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Backup Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Create Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Drop Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Make Database Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Erase MCS Database Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Rebuild Database Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Set Menu Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Database Table Record Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
View TTY File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Page viii

Page

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

FIGURES

Figure

Title

12-11
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15

FLF/RCF Download to PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Host Interface Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Interface Log File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Interface Initialization/Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Interface Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Beeper Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Beeper Software Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Console Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Database Beeper Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Local Pager Message Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Pager Message Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Beeper Codes Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Beeper Interface Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Misc Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Port Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Timer Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
View Log File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Beeper Transaction Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page

Page ix

FIGURES

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page x

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 1

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

What is Medical Center System?
The Medical Center System (MCS) provides enhanced operator functions and call
handling for a medical center environment. MCS combines the NEC Advanced
Attendant Console with a general purpose computer equipped with a UNIX
System V operating environment, the NEC Applications Manager support
platform, and a comprehensive package of software components.
MCS operates with a SN716 Attendant Console. The illustration below (Figure 11) shows the MCS components in a typical configuration:

Hospital or other
Remote Computer

Internal Station

Music

NEAX2400 IMS
PBX
Paging System
UAP
Computer

Announcement
Trunk
MCS
Attendant Console Station
Trunk

Optional
Network

PC Workstation

Lines
SN716

TCP/IP
Network
APM &
Applications

OAI Connection (TCP/IP Network)

Figure 1-1 Medical Center System

MCS provides enhanced functionality by using the NEC Open Applications
Interface (OAI) communication pathway between the UAP computer and the
NEAX2400 PBX system. The PBX and UAP utilize standard TCP/IP network
media for communication allowing flexible deployment options.
The MCS JAVA Edition (MCS-JE) includes a JAVA based client Graphical User
Interface (GUI) that can be installed on any PC Workstation that supports Sun
Microsystems JAVA Virtual Machine (JVM) Release 1.1.7 or greater. The MCSJE client installation provides a compatible JVM runtime for Microsoft Windows
9x.
MCS-JE also supports previous MCS customers that do not use PC Workstations
to connect to the MCS UAP. The MCS-JE software components can be configured
with either PC Workstations and existing attendant console stations. This
capability provides a choice for the customer of how and when to upgrade.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 1

INTRODUCTION

Telnet and JAVA
Interfaces

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

The MCS-JE supports both JAVA GUI and the character based Telnet terminal
session interfaces. The JAVA GUI is available for operator features and functions.
Database administration between the PC Workstation (client) and the MCS UAP
uses the character based Telnet interface.
To use the character based interface, a third-party terminal emulation program that
supports the Telnet session protocols must be installed on the PC Workstation. The
standard MS Windows Telnet program is NOT recommended as it does not
adequately support colors and cursor positioning. Other commercial terminal
emulation programs that support Telnet sessions such as PowerTerm or SCO
TermVision are suggested.

Operator
Functions

MCS provides up to 16 medical center operators with an on-screen display of caller
information and an interactive screen for caller assistance using the functions:
• Directory Assistance – Provides information retrieval from a computer
database and directs incoming calls to their destinations. The database contains
patient, staff, and other information that is designed for either stand-alone use
or for interactive transactions with a remote database server.
• Park/Page Retrieval – Allows the operator to transfer an incoming call to an
announcement trunk or to a monitored number for later retrieval.
• Beeper Connection – Displays a database listing of beeper assignments.
Automatic call placement and manual entry of message codes is supported.
Alphanumeric beeper messaging is supported with an add-on beeper interface
package.
• Redial Caller – Automatically attempts to reestablish connection with the most
previous internal extension.
• Emergency Response – Displays a database of emergency response teams and
agencies for operator selection, and automatically places the chosen call.

Supervisor
Functions

MCS provides supervisory functions using password security access for the
management of the MCS resources used by MCS operator functions. The
Supervisor may perform the following functions by accessing the menu items
listed below:
• Database Administration – Add, delete, modify, view, and print the large
variety of database records that are required by MCS operator functions.
• System Administration – Make extension assignments, including the types of
restrictions that affect their use, and direct inward dialing numbers controlled
by MCS.
• Configuration Management – Modify or print configuration parameters that
affect processing of time-outs and the Operator Functions display fields.
• Login Maintenance – Manage the MCS login and password security system as
well as to activate specific operators.

Page 2

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

INTRODUCTION

• Supervisor Reports – View and print statistical reports generated from
operator call processing activity.
Note:

The initial release of MCS-JE does not support JAVA GUI interfaces for all supervisory functions. Where not supported, the Telnet session interface will be
used.

In addition to these menu-driven capabilities, the supervisor can respond to an
operator emergency alert by silently monitoring an ongoing conversation between
a caller and an operator.

Password Security

The MCS menu system serves up to 16 operators and one supervisor. Operators can
be configured with operator functions or with operator and database management
capabilities. If operators are not configured for access to database functions,
entering the operator password on the login screen automatically displays an
Operator Functions screen.
The supervisor can access all operator functions as well as database, configuration,
login name, and report management options. Authorized access by the supervisor
displays the full MCS Main Menu.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 3

INTRODUCTION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

How to Use This Manual
Manual
Organization

This manual is organized around the MCS Main Menu illustrated in Chapter 3 for
the Telnet interface and Chapter 4 for the JAVA GUI interface. The later chapters
describe these Main Menu features and functions. Refer to the following chapters
to install, configure, and operate MCS-JE:
• Chapter 2, “SERVER INSTALLATION”
• This chapter addresses the server hardware and software installation of MCS as
well as the necessary configuration files, databases, and other data and
equipment assignments that are required by MCS.
• Chapter 3, “JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION”
If using the JAVA GUI, this describes the procedure to install the MCS-JE JAVA
GUI on a PC Workstation.
• Chapter 4, “TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS”
This provides an illustrated reference and procedural guide to all of the
functions provided to MCS operators using the Telnet protocol interface.
• Chapter 5, “JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS”
This chapter provide an illustrated reference and procedural guide to all of the
functions provided to MCS operators using the JAVA GUI.
• Chapter 6, “DATABASE ADMINISTRATION”
This chapter describes the procedures to manage the various types of database
records used by MCS.
• Chapter 7, “SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION”
This describes phone equipment numbers (e.g., extensions and trunk numbers)
and the necessary assignments associated to them.
• Chapter 8, “CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT”
This chapter describes configuration parameters that affect MCS operation and
that can be modified by the supervisor as necessary.
• Chapter 9, “LOGIN NAME MAINTENANCE”
This describes the procedures for a supervisor to manage the login name and
password security system.
• Chapter 10, “SUPERVISOR REPORTS”
This chapter describes the procedures for the supervisor with information on
how to view call processing statistics by operator on a daily basis.

Page 4

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

INTRODUCTION

• Chapter 11, “PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES”
This chapter presents an alphabetical list of the messages that might appear
throughout MCS screen operations with a brief description of their meaning and
recovery measures, if appropriate.
• Chapter 12, “PLATFORM MANAGEMENT”
This chapter provides illustrated instructions for performing various tasks in
support of MCS functions, including backing up the database on tape, managing
the database indexes, resetting the colors seen on the MCS screens, and
displaying MCS records and terminal assignments.
• Chapter 13, “HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION”
This chapter describes the options that are available for managing the
communication interface between the MCS and the hospital information
system, including log file access, initialization and termination of the interface,
and configuration and statistical data.
• Appendix A, “BEEPER INTERFACE”
This appendix describes the features and basic operation of NEC’s MCS
alphanumeric paging interface.

Chapter Layout
When using MCS, you can often choose a Main Menu option to display either a
second-level menu of options (e.g., choose the System Administration option on
the Main Menu to display the System Administration menu) or a new series of
commands (e.g., Add, Delete, Modify). The chapters in this manual follow the
same organization in that each second-level menu option or command is presented
as a separate section.
Each multi-level chapter begins with an overview that describes the entire chapter
and the options discussed within the chapter. Each section includes an illustration
of the screen(s) or window(s) associated with the procedure, information related to
performance of the procedure, and step-by-step instructions.
Some graphics illustrate the progression among a group of related screens.

Medical Center System

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor
***

(1)

Main Menu ***
(2)

*** MCS System Administration ***
(3)
Operator Functions
Database Administration RSC DEscriptions
Extension Maintenance *** Extension Maintenance ***
System Administration
Patient DID Numbers
Patient Room Extensions
Attendant Console Extensions
Nurse Station Extensions

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 5

INTRODUCTION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

The numbers in parentheses beside each screen graphic represent the number of the
screen in the progression. These numbers are referenced in the procedural
instructions, where applicable, to help you associate the action with the appropriate
screen. In the illustration above, the Extension Main ten ace screen (3) displays
after you select System Administration from the Main Menu (1) and Extension
Maintenance from the MCS System Administration screen (2).

Option/Command
Selection

Page 6

Commands can be selected in either of two ways that are configurable through the
Configuration Management option on the MCS Main Menu. Either you type the
first letter of the command to immediately implement that command, or you type
the first letter of the command followed by the Enter key. Instructions provided in
this manual are all based upon entry of the first letter. When the first letter of a
command or menu options has been used for another option on that screen, the next
unused letter in the word is highlighted for use.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

INTRODUCTION

Procedures
Each section includes step-by-step instructions on how to select and move to the
required screen and how to perform the available actions. The procedures are
presented in a two-column layout. The left column contains the action to be taken.
The right column contains the results of that action. Where there are field entries
to be made on the screen, this manual provides field names in the left column and
corresponding field definitions in the right column.
Action

Result

On the Main Menu, type s to select the The System Administration menu
System Administration option. (1)
displays. (2)
On the System Administration menu,
type e to select the Extension
Maintenance option.

The Extension Maintenance menu
displays. (3)

General Key Use
Throughout MCS, the following keys generally perform the actions described
below.
Note:

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Clear notation is made wherever other key or key combinations apply or these do
not.

Enter

–

Accepts a selection or field entry.

Esc

–

Generally exits the current screen or action to the last
screen or action.

Arrow keys

–

Move the cursor in the direction shown.

Space bar

–

Selects an option when more than one is available in a
field; serves to toggle among scrolled or side-by-side
options in a field.

Backspace

–

Erases any data in a field.

Tab

–

Expands a data record to expose more information or
provide other options that can be selected.

Page 7

INTRODUCTION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page 8

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 2

SERVER INSTALLATION

SERVER INSTALLATION

Introduction
This chapter provides a step-by-step description of the installation and setup of
Medical Center System (MCS). The following steps must be taken before MCS can
be installed:
1. The OAI/APM system must be installed on the SCO UNIX system.
2. The Informix Dynamic Server (IDS) Workgroup Edition Version 7.30 must be
installed on the SCO UNIX system.
Note:

A system obtained through NEC CNG Division will normally have been preconfigured with these requirements. If reinstalling or upgrading a system, the installer should contact NEC to obtain the system staging procedures.

The installation and setup of MCS involves the following procedure. Perform the
installation in this sequence and refer to the listed sections for detailed instructions:
1. Hardware Installation on page 11
Each attendant station consists of an NEC Advanced Attendant Console and a
CRT. This section presents the attendant setup for each station and discusses
how the hardware configurations are used to determine software characteristics.
2. Software Installation on page 12
This section discusses installation and configuration of the MCS software
components of the UAP.
3. Application Configuration on page 19
MCS is internally supported by the Applications Manager (APM) and must
therefore be set up in the APM environment. This section presents a detailed
description of the required setup. Use the instructions provided in the APM
Operations Manual to make the entries contained in this section.
4. Database Requirements on page 32
MCS provides two default APM databases that are loaded during software
installation. One of these databases can be changed through the APM Database
Administration option. This section defines the fields and entries in this
database. Use the instructions provided in the APM Operations Manual to make
any required changes to the database presented in this section.
5. MAT Assignments on page 34
Specific data settings must be assigned at the NEAX2400 Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) before MCS will function. This section
specifies the necessary commands and the values to which they are to be set.
6. Attendant Station Preparation on page 35
Attendant stations are set up via the MCS Main Menu. Enter from the UNIX
login prompt during this step.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 9

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

7. Extension Installation
After the installation is performed as outlined in Steps 1 through 6, the extensions
must be added to the Informix database. Each extension is assigned through the
Extension Maintenance option, entered from the System Administration option on
the MCS Main Menu.
Note:

In some cases, sequence is important in the assignment process. We recommend a review of Chapter 7, “SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION” before beginning these assignments.

The Applications Manager Operations Manual provides detailed instructions for using
the APM menus and for completing the data entry screens shown in this manual.
NEAX2400 IMS System manuals provide the procedures for making the data
assignments at the NEAX MAT.

Page 10

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SERVER INSTALLATION

Hardware Installation
The hardware configuration of each attendant station determines the software
characteristics for the attendant configuration in JAVA MCS. Each MCS attendant
station consists of an NEC Advanced Attendant Console and a PC Workstation, and
each is identified by the following unique characteristics:

Number
Attendant
Station

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Attendant ID:

An attendant console equipment number for each particular station
ranging from 1 to 16.

Extension:

A unique extension assigned to the attendant console on the PBX.

Number each attendant station with a unique value between 1 and 16, and label each
with its assigned Attendant ID. The easiest method is to make the station Attendant ID
match the logical ID of each attendant console as it is assigned on the NEAX
Maintenance Administration Terminal. (Refer to MAT Assignments on page 34 for
more information.)

Page 11

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Software Installation
This section discusses the installation of MCS software from the release media and
describes the required MCS software configurations. Before beginning this section, be
sure to install the UNIX operating system, including the raw partition required for
Informix, and the Applications Manager platform. Refer to the instructions provided
with each of these software packages for more information.
Installation of MCS software is initiated from the Applications Manager (APM)
Platform Maintenance Main Menu. To display this menu, type the login apmadm at
the UNIX prompt and press Enter. When prompted, type the assigned password and
press Enter. Using instructions in the APM Operations Manual, select and implement
the Installation of Applications/Packages option from this menu to load MCS
software from release media. As the installation process executes, follow the steps
described below as they correspond to the screen display, and make entries as
indicated. Required input is shown in boldface type.

Step 1:
Superuser/
Root Password

Type the password for the root login and press Enter to continue. If you type an invalid
password, the message “Error entering root password. Installation failed” displays, the
installation cancels, and you must restart the installation.
MCS Installation
Installation requires Super User (root) privileges.
NOTE: To re-run this script login as ‘apmadm’ get to ‘Unix’
and execute the following command ‘/oai/install/mcs.ins’.
su root:
Password:  

Figure 2-1 Super User Root

After entering a valid root password, the MCS user account installation will quickly
display several screens as the install process continues. Some example screens are
shown below:
Installing 16 mcs network users on SCO UNIX.
User (mcs1) installed.
User (mcs2) installed.
User (mcs3) installed.
User (mcs4) installed.

Deleting password for user: mcs1
Last successful password change for mcs1: NEVER
Deleting password for user: mcs2
Last successful password change for mcs2: NEVER

Figure 2-2 Example Install Screens

Page 12

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 2: MCS
Login Names

The mcs and mcsadm login names are installed with the same user ID. (The default is
4001.) Any change in the user ID value must be made for both login names, since they
both use the same user ID value. Press Enter at each user ID prompt to accept the
default value. A warning message displays when the 4001 user is being installed. Type
‘y’ and press Enter at the warning prompt and continue the installation. The
installation should default through this section. If another user is using the assigned ID,
you will need to select another ID by adding one to the default until it can be assigned.

Step 3: MCS
Installation
Processing

The installation script performs several steps after you enter the login name.
Information about these steps displays as they are performed. None of these steps
require input. This process includes the following actions:
• Entering boot-up commands into UNIX boot-up sequence.
• Installing all remaining MCS files and directories as well as MCS host directories
and executables.
• Entering MCS crontab information.
At the prompt, type ‘y’ and press Enter to continue the installation.
.
.
.
Installing MCS system boot sequence...
mcs crontabs entries complete...
Installing gettydefs entry for MCS.
Installing MCS directories and executables...
Continue with installation of Mcs/Informix Database (y/n) [ ]

Figure 2-3 MCS Installation Processing

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 13

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 4: Informix
Database
Installation

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

The figure below shows a normal execution of the Informix setup and includes the
required input for each prompt. Type y and press Enter if this is the first time this
installation is being performed.
The informix user must not have a password, as described in the APM Informix
Installation section. If the informix user does have a password, this step will fail.
Required input is shown in boldface type.
Please Enter su/informix Password: 
MCS Informix Database Installation
Bringing Informix Database Engine On-line...
Does .the Mcs Database already exist? (y/n) n 
Creating
. MCS Informix database...
.
Creating Mcs
database: [mcsdb].
Mcs database [mcsdb] created.
MCS Informix database created.
Do the
. Mcs Database Indexes already exist? (y/n) n 
..
Building Mcs database indexes: [mcsdb].
Mcs database [mcsdb] indexes built.
.
..
MCS Installation Complete.

Figure 2-4 Informix Setup

The APM Main Menu displays. Select the Logout option from the Main Menu.

Step 5: Jmcmp
Server
Software
Installation

JMCMP Pre-Install
This installs the Java JMCMP server software. The JMCMP Pre-Install step of the
installation checks for previous installed versions of JMCMP Server. If no previous
versions exist, the following is displayed: Press Enter to continue.
JMCMP Server Pre-Install
Checking the system configuration....
JMCMP Server Pre-Install Complete
Press "Enter" to Continue Installation:

Figure 2-5 Jmcmp Pre-Install - 1st Install

Page 14

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Step 5: Jmcmp
Server
Software
Installation
(Cont)

SERVER INSTALLATION

However, if a previous version is detected, an option is given to either upgrade (leaving
configured data alone), overwrite (completely overwrite all Jmcmp data), or abort the
installation. Enter ‘u’, ‘o’, or ‘a’ to upgrade, overwrite, or abort the installation and
then press Enter.
JMCMP Server Pre-Install
Checking the system configuration....
JMCMP Server Ver1.0 Currently Installed
Do you wish to upgrade, overwrite the existing
JMCMP Server Installation or Abort? (u/o/a):

Figure 2-6 Jmcmp Pre-Install - Install Options

If the upgrade option is chosen, the following is displayed: Press Enter to continue
Saving Current JMCMP Server Applications and Configurations
To insure access to data please login as root
Login: root
Password:
Adjusting directory access ... Done.
JMCMP Server Pre-Install Complete
Press "Enter" to Continue Installation:

Figure 2-7 Jmcmp Pre-Install - Upgrade Option

If the overwrite option is chosen, the following is displayed: Press Enter to continue
Overwriting Existing JMCMP Server Installation
To insure access to data please login as root
Login: root
Password:
Adjusting directory access ... Done.
JMCMP Server Pre-Install Complete
Press "Enter" to Continue Installation:

Figure 2-8 Jmcmp Pre-Install - Overwrite Option

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 15

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 5: Jmcmp
Server
Software
Installation
(Cont)

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JMCMP Install
After the Pre-Install phase of installation, the following is displayed:
Installation requires Super User (root) privileges.
NOTE: To re-run this script login as ’apmadm’ get to ’Unix’
and execute the following command ’/oai/install/jmcmpServer.ins’.
su root
Password:

Figure 2-9 Jmcmp Installation - Access to Data

Enter the root password and press Enter to allow proper access to configuration data.
If this is a first install of Jmcmp Server, the following is displayed:

Initial JMCMP Server Install
Unpacking Install JMCMP Server Ver1.0.

Figure 2-10 Jmcmp Installation - Initial Installation

If the upgrade option is selected, as described in Figure 2-6, “Jmcmp Pre-Install - Install
Options” on page 15, the Jmcmp Server application, the following is displayed:
Upgrading JMCMP Server Ver1.0 to Ver1.1
Unpacking Upgrade JMCMP Server Ver1.0
Installation Complete
Hit "Enter" to continue:

Figure 2-11 Jmcmp Installation - Upgrade Installation

Pressing Enter installs the new applications, and then restores all configuration data
from the previous installation. For the ‘Upgrade’ option, no other configuration is
needed, and installation is complete.

Page 16

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Step 5: Jmcmp
Server
Software
Installation
(Cont)

SERVER INSTALLATION

If overwrite the existing installation is selected, the following is displayed:

Overwriting JMCMP Server Ver1.0
Unpacking Install JMCMP Server Ver1.0.

Figure 2-12 Jmcmp Installation - Overwrite Installation

This installs the new applications, plus sets all configuration data to default values. If
the Jmcmp Server was previously installed, the APM application “JmcmpConnServer”
may already be configured. If so, the following is displayed:

Application "JmcmpConnServer" is already configured.
Do you wish to overwrite current configuration
data with the new default data? (y/n)

Figure 2-13 Jmcmp Installation - Overwrite APM Application Configuration

To keep the same configuration parameters for the APM application
“JmcmpConnServer”, type ‘n’ and press Enter. To set the configuration parameters to
default values, which must be modified later, type ‘y’and press Enter.
If this is an “Initial” installation, or if overwriting the existing installation, the
allowable client connections to the Jmcmp Server must be defined. The following is
displayed:
JMCMP Server Connection ID Configuration
For each Java Client connection, an identifier must be
defined. The identifier can be either:
(a) A fully qualified host name, or a hostname that can be
resolved on the Server machine.
(e.g., "clientmachine.domain.com")
(b) The 32-bit IP address of the client machine.
(e.g., "123.45.678.901")
(c) The 48-bit MAC address (Ethernet address) of the client’s
Network Interface Card.
(e.g. 00:20:af:9c:5a:b3)
Do you wish to edit the JMCMP Server Connection ID configuration
file at this time (vi editor) ? (y/n)
NOTE: To exit the vi editor without saving, enter ":q!"
(Hit Enter to continue)

Figure 2-14 Allowable Client Connections Description

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 17

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 5: Jmcmp
Server
Software
Installation
(Cont)

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Entering ‘y’ and pressing Enter starts up the ‘vi’ editor, allowing modifications to the
User Address Mapping File:
#
# User Address Mapping File
#
#
In
# POS Use Address
# --- --- -----------------01 0 localhost
02 0
03 0
04 0
05 0
06 0
07 0
08 0
09 0
10 0
11 0
12 0
13 0
14 0
15 0
16 0

Figure 2-15 Allowable Client Connections Configuration File

For each client position, enter the hostname, IP address, or MAC address of the client
machine. When the installation is complete, the following is displayed:
NEC America Inc

JmcmpConnServer Ver1.0 Installation

Wed - Aug 25, 1999

Installation Complete
Hit "Enter" to continue:

Figure 2-16 Jmcmp Installation - Installation Complete

Step 6: Java
Server/Client
Component
Installation

Page 18

A Java software component must be installed on the server to enable communication
with Java clients. This installation is initiated from the Applications Manager (APM)
Platform Maintenance Main Menu. To display this menu, type the login apmadm at
the UNIX prompt and press Enter. When prompted, type the assigned password and
press Enter. Using instructions in the APM Operations Manual, select and implement
the Installation of Applications/Packages option from this menu to load this software
component from release media. When all release media has been loaded, the
installation of this component is complete. No further setup is required for this
component.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SERVER INSTALLATION

Application Configuration
MCS is internally supported by the APM and must be configured in the APM
environment.
MCS uses an autoconfiguration utility program to automatically configure some MCS
settings for the APM platform. This program utility runs upon installation. If the utility
runs successfully, specific adjustments can be made to the application parameters,
depending on site requirements.
Note:

If an error occurs during installation, you can try to run the autoconfig program again
or you can enter the information into the APM manually using the information provided in this chapter.

After the autoconfiguration utility has run successfully, the initialization time settings
for the database processing applications must now be configured. Configuring these
settings is described in three steps ( on page 28, Step 9: Mcs_Recluster Control Options
on page 30, Step 10: Mcs_Host_ Statistics Control Options on page 30) in the
following pages.
MCS is configured into the APM system using the Add command on the Application
Configuration screen. To access the Application Configuration option, use the
following steps:
1. Type the System Administrator password at the APM password screen.
2. Select the Application Configuration option from the System Administration
menu.
This section contains the data that should be entered to the configuration file for MCS.
The following components must be configured:

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Monitor

–

Controls call parking and retrieval, restrictions, and DID number
management.

Server

–

Controls source caller data displayed on the attendant consoles,
directory assistance, and beeper functions. You may need to set up
more than one server, depending on the server ratio and the
number of attendants. (Refer to the Server Ratio section in
Database Requirements on page 32.)

Recluster

–

Periodically reclusters Informix system tables for more efficient
processing of the database. You must schedule this component
under Control Options on the APM Operations Menu in order for
it to function automatically.

Host Statistics –

Periodically creates a log that contains the count of records
received from the Hospital Information System, including
admissions, discharges, and transfers. All error transactions will
appear in the log. You can display the log file from the Statistics
option on the MCS Administration Menu (login: mcsadm).

Page 19

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Cleaner

–

Periodically cleans out any records of patients that have been
discharged. It also makes available DID numbers that have been
offered but not assigned to an admitted patient after a set amount
of time. You must schedule this component under Control Options
on the APM Operations Menu in order for it to function
automatically.

Java Services

–

Controls the Java graphical user interface between the host server
and the Java client workstations. All component parameters are
automatically configured at installation.

For instructions on what these parameters mean and how to make these entries, refer to
the APM Operations Manual.

Step 1:
Application
Characteristics

To add MCS to the APM Application Configuration file, set up each of its components
exactly as follows:

Parameter

Monitor

Server

Cleaner

Recluster

Host
Statistics

JAVA
Services

OAI Application

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

CRT Application

N

N

N

N

N

N

Communication
Queue

N

N

N

N

N

N

Parameter Definitions:
OAI Application

– Whether (Yes or No) this component communicates with
the NEAX2400 using OAI processes.

CRT Application

– Whether (Yes or No) this component runs on the same
screen as the APM, rendering the APM temporarily
inaccessible.

Communication Queue – Whether (Yes or No) this non-OAI application needs an
IPC queue to communicate with other processes.

Page 20

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Step 2: Monitor
Configuration

SERVER INSTALLATION

Primary Configuration Parameters
On the APM Configuration Entry screen, make entries for each parameter shown
below. The application name for the server is a derivation of the name configured in
the Server Base Name field of the mcscfg database. For parameters shown with an
asterisk (*) in the table below, make the entries exactly as shown. The other parameter
entries are shown with sample entries that may be changed to meet site requirements.
Parameter

Monitor

Application Name

Mcs_Monitor

Executable Filename*

/oai/app/mcs/bin/mccdmn

Group*

MCS

Response Mode*

N(otify)

Initialization Batch

N(o)

Termination Mode*

M(essage)

Standard Output

/dev/null

Number of Restarts

*

Parameter Definitions:
Application Name

–

The name displayed in the APM menus. This name is
displayed as it is entered here. You can use lowercase
letters and punctuation but not spaces.

Executable Filename* –

The path name of the executable file.

Group*

–

The group to which the component is tied.

Response Mode*

–

The action that the APM is to take with the
component if a member of the group terminates.

Initialization Batch

–

Whether (Yes or No) the component is to be
initialized automatically when the OAI system is
initialized.

Termination Mode*

–

How the APM is to notify the component to
terminate.

Standard Output

–

The file into which component output is redirected.

Number of Restarts

–

How many times the APM may restart the component
after it terminates in error.

Facilities
According to instructions in the APM Operations Manual, name the following
NEAX2400 facilities for the designated components using the Facilities command on
the APM Configuration Entry screen:
FLF
RCF
SCF

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Free Location
Restriction Control
Switch Control

SMFN
SMFR

Status Notification (N)
Status Request (R)

Page 21

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 2: Monitor
Configuration
(Cont)

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

OAI Configuration
Use the OAI-Conf command on the APM Configuration Entry screen to make the
necessary parameter entries. For parameters shown with an asterisk (*) in the table
below, make entries exactly as shown. The other parameters are shown with sample
entries that may be changed to meet site requirements. Use the instructions provided
for this option in the APM Operations Manual:
Parameter

Database Name #1*
Database Name #2*

Entry

/oai/db/cur/Mcscfg

The path name of the database
containing setup information.

/oai/db/cur/Mcsfile

All the directory and file names
needed by the MCS.

10

How many seconds to wait before
trying to place a call again on an
ANT.

5

Not Used

1

Tenant for the conversation
monitoring extension, attendant
consoles, announcement and
dictation trunks, and the parking
monitored number.

OAI1TCP

Port on the source side of the
communication link. Entry
should match a link name in the
APM system configuration file.

PBX1TCP

Port on the destination side of the
communication link. Entry
should match a link name in the
APM system configuration file.

40

Number of seconds Mcs_Monitor
waits before trying to reestablish
an association with the NEAX
that has been released.

Timeout Value #1

Timeout Value #2
Tenant Number

Source Link Name

Destination Link Name

Association Recovery

Page 22

Description

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Step 2: Monitor
Configuration
(Cont)

User-Defined Parameters
Make the additional parameter entries exactly as shown below through the
UserDefined command on the OAI Configuration screen.
User Defined #

Entry

Description

5

Number of seconds to wait for a response
from an attendant console before assuming
that communication with it is not working.

1

2
600

Number of seconds between handshakes
between the monitor and the attendant
consoles.

15

Number of seconds that the attendant
console has to respond to a handshake with
the monitor before it is considered disabled.

600

Number of seconds between checks of
Server function by the monitor.

0#

The operator to which all parked calls are
recalled when the monitor is initialized.

5

Maximum number of Server restarts.

3

4
5
6
7
8

Priority access code used for multiple recall.
100

9

11

Maximum number of records to be retrieved
in any one database search.

37121

Error code that is returned from the PBX
indicating that the attendant is idle. Type
37125 for NEAX version J.4.02 or lower.
Type 37121 for NEAX version J.4.10 or
higher.

37122

On the MMG, the error code that is returned
from the PBX indicating locked attendant
memory. Leave this field blank for any other
PBX version.

10

NDA-30026 Revision 6

SERVER INSTALLATION

2

Number of times MCS is to retry after
receiving error code 37122.

Page 23

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 3: Server
Configuration

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Primary Configuration Parameters
On the APM Configuration Entry screen, make entries for each parameter shown
below. The application name for the server is a derivation of the name configured in
the Server Base Name field of the mcscfg database. For parameters shown with an
asterisk (*) in the table below, make the entries exactly as shown. The other parameters
are shown with sample entries that may be changed to meet site requirements.
Parameter

Server

Application Name

Mcs_Server1

Executable Filename*

/oai/app/mcs/bin/mccsrv

Group*

MCS

Response Mode*

I(gnore)

Initialization Batch

N(o)

Termination Mode*

M(essage)

Standard Output

/dev/null

Number of Restarts

0

For information on parameter definitions, see page 21.

Facilities
According to instructions in the APM Operations Manual, name the following
NEAX2400 facilities for the designated components using the Facilities command on
the APM Configuration Entry screen:
SCF
SMFR

Page 24

Switch Control
Status Request (R)

SMFN

Status Notification (N)

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Step 3: Server
Configuration
(Cont)

SERVER INSTALLATION

OAI Configuration
Use the OAI-Conf command on the APM Configuration Entry screen to make the
necessary parameter entries. For parameters shown with an asterisk (*) in the table
below, make entries exactly as shown. The other parameters are shown with sample
entries that may be changed to meet site requirements. Use the instructions provided
for this option in the APM Operations Manual:
Parameter

Database Name #1*
Database Name #2*

Entry

Description

/oai/db/cur/mcscfg

Path name of the database
containing setup information.

/oai/db/cur/mcsfile

All the directory and file
names needed by the MCS.

Timeout Value #1
5

Number of seconds to wait for
a response from an attendant
console before assuming that
communication with it is not
working.

60

Number of seconds to wait
before clearing lit LEDs after
placing an emergency alert.

1

Tenant for the conversation
monitoring extension,
attendant consoles,
announcement and dictation
trunks, and the parking
monitored number.

OAI1TCP

Port on the source side of the
communication link. Entry
should match a link name in
the APM system
configuration file.

PBX1TCP

Port on the destination side of
the communication link. Entry
should match a link name in
the APM system
configuration file.

40

Number of seconds the
monitor waits before trying to
reestablish an association with
the NEAX.

Timeout Value #2

Tenant Number

Source Link Name

Destination Link Name

Association Recovery

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 25

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 3: Server
Configuration
(Cont)

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

User-Defined Parameters
Make the additional parameter entries exactly as shown below through the
UserDefined command on the OAI Configuration screen.
User Defined #

Entry

1

2
3

Dictation trunk number for conversation
monitoring. If no dictation trunk is to be
used, leave this field blank.
Mcs_Monitor

Monitor component logical name.

10

Call kind field that shows priority
notification on the PBX.

4

3276

Number of the MCS shared memory key.

5

3276

Number of the MCS semaphore key.

6

If set to a value, this field enables the
checking of a Dterm for do-not-disturb status
prior to call routing.

7
3

Enables MCS to process multiple recalls.
Set to 3 for J.4.02 or earlier PBX firmware
versions, 11 for later versions without
multiple recall, or 19 for later versions with
multiple recall.

37122

On the MMG, the error code that is returned
from the PBX indicating locked attendant
memory. Leave this field blank for any other
PBX version.

8

9
10

Page 26

Description

2
/oai/app/mcs/
menus/
Mserver.cfg

Number of times MCS is to retry after
receiving error code 37122.
Configured by MCS application

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Step 4:
Recluster
Primary
Configuration

SERVER INSTALLATION

On the APM Configuration Entry screen, make entries for each parameter shown
below. The application name for the server is a derivation of the name configured in
the Server Base Name field of the mcscfg database. For parameters shown with an
asterisk (*) in the table below, make the entries exactly as shown. The other parameters
are shown with sample entries that may be changed to meet site requirements.
Parameter

Recluster Entry

Application Name

Mcs_ReclusterTables

Executable Filename*

/oai/app/mcs/etc/update

Group*
Response Mode*

I(gnore)

Initialization Batch

N(o)

Termination Mode*

K(ill)

Standard Output

/dev/null

Number of Restarts

0

For information on parameter definitions, see page 21.

Step 5: Host
Statistics
Primary
Configuration

On the APM Configuration Entry screen, make entries for each parameter shown
below. The application name for the server is a derivation of the name configured in
the Server Base Name field of the mcscfg database. For parameters shown with an
asterisk (*) in the table below, make the entries exactly as shown. The other parameters
are shown with sample entries that may be changed to meet site requirements.
Note:

These parameters are initially configured by the MCS host interface.
Parameter

Host Statistics_ Entry

Application Name

Mcs_Host_Statistics

Executable Filename*

/oai/app/mcs/host/bin/hoststats

Group*
Response Mode*

I(gnore)

Initialization Batch

N(o)

Termination Mode*

K(ill)

Standard Output

/dev/null

Number of Restarts

0

For information on parameter definitions, see page 21.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 27

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 6: Cleaner
Primary
Configuration

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

On the APM Configuration Entry screen, make entries for each parameter shown
below. The application name for the server is a derivation of the name configured in
the Server Base Name field of the mcscfg database. For parameters shown with an
asterisk (*) in the table below, make the entries exactly as shown. The other parameters
are shown with sample entries that may be changed to meet site requirements.
Parameter

Cleaner Entry

Application Name

Mcs_Dbclean

Executable Filename*

/oai/app/mcs/bin/dbclean

Group*
Response Mode*

I(gnore)

Initialization Batch

N(o)

Termination Mode*

K(ill)

Standard Output

/dev/null

Number of Restarts

0

For information on parameter definitions, see page 21.

User-Defined Parameters

Page 28

User Defined #

Entry

Description

1

138

Discharge record release time in hours.
(Records for discharged patients are
removed from the database after the defined
number of hours.)

2

72

DID number release time in minutes.
(DID numbers for discharged patients are
deleted from database after the defined
number of minutes.)

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Step 7: Java
Services
Primary
Configuration

SERVER INSTALLATION

The APM configuration parameters are automatically set during the Java MCMP
Server installation. Some of the user-defined parameters may need to be modified to
reflect the installation site’s configuration.
Parameter

Entry

OAI Application

N

CRT Application

N

Communication Queue

N

Application Name

JmcmpConnServer

Executable Filename

/oai/app/mcs/bin/jmcmpConnServ

Group

JMCMP

Response Mode

Ignore

Initialization Batch

Y

Termination Mode

T

Standard Output

/dev/null

Number of Restarts

5

User-Defined Parameters
User Defined #

1

Default Value

Description

2030

JMCMP Server Port This is the TCP I/P port number
on which JMCMP Server is
listening.

(Do not change this
value unless this port
number conflicts with
another listening port.)
/oai/app/mcs/bin/
jmcmp

2

NDA-30026 Revision 6

JMCMP Application Path This defines the absolute path of
the JMCMP process spawned by
(Do not change unless the JMCMP Server when a
this application has connection is made.
been renamed.)

Page 29

SERVER INSTALLATION

Step 8:
Mcs_Dbclean
Control
Options

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

From the APM Administration Menu, select Control Options. When the Control
Options screen displays, select the Applications command. Then, select Mcs_Dbclean
and set up the schedule for its execution, as illustrated in the following example:
Initialize:
Minute (0-59):
Hour of Day (0-23):
Day of Month (1-31):
Month of Year (1-12):
Day of Week (0-6):

1
0
*
*
*

When you have entered these choices, select Quit and then type Y to save the data. The
Applications menu redisplays.
Mcs_Dbclean automatically ends processing when it has cleaned up the database.

Step 9:
Mcs_Recluster
Control
Options

From the APM Administration Menu, select Control Options. When the Control
Options screen displays, select the Applications command. Then, select
Mcs_Recluster and set up the schedule for its execution, as the sample shows below:
Initialize:
Minute (0-59):
Hour of Day (0-23):
Day of Month (1-31):
Month of Year (1-12):
Day of Week (0-6):

5
0
*
*
*

When you have entered these choices, select Quit and then type Y to save the data. The
Applications menu redisplays.
Mcs_Recluster automatically ends processing when it has reclustered the database.

Step 10:
Mcs_Host_
Statistics
Control
Options

From the APM Administration Menu, select Control Options. When the Control
Options screen displays, select the Applications command. Then, select
Mcs_Host_Statistics and set up the schedule for its execution, as illustrated in the
following example:
Initialize:
Minute (0-59):
Hour of Day (0-23):
Day of Month (1-31):
Month of Year (1-12):
Day of Week (0-6):

10
0
*
*
*

When you have entered these choices, select Quit and then type Y to save the data. The
Applications menu redisplays.
Mcs_Host_Statistics automatically ends processing when it has generated the
statistics.

Page 30

NDA-30026 Revision 6

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This completes the configuration of MCS in the APM. Now go to the Database
Requirements on page 32 to prepare its database support.

Page 31

NDA-30026 Revision 6

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Database Requirements
MCS requires two APM databases that were installed with default values when the
software was loaded from the release media. Only one (mcscfg) can be modified. The
other database (mcsfile) should not be changed at all without first consulting technical
support. You can change the mcscfg database through the Database Administration
option on the APM System Administration Menu.
The contents of the mcscfg database are described below. Using instructions provided
in the APM Operations Manual, enter the APM System Administration Menu and
change mcscfg database entries as required through the Database Administration
option. Any messages displayed during these steps are described in the Process and
Error Messages chapter of the APM Operations Manual.
Note:

MCSCFG
Database
Information

Remember to process and install mcscfg after any of the following field information
has been changed through the Build Master Database option.

Remember to configure each additional Server (i.e., Application Configuration.)
Server Base Name = Mcs_Server#
The name of the Server component. The # marks the position of the actual number
of the Server process.
Server Ratio = 8
The number of attendants that can be served by any one Server component. This is
the default value. Given that there are 16 attendants at most, there should be at least
two Server components configured (Mcs_Server1 and Mcs_Server2).
Max Number of MCMP’s = 16
The maximum number of attendants this system can handle. Changing this value
has no effect. The maximum is always 16.
Conversation Monitoring # = 7207
The extension number of the Dterm used during a Supervisor Alert operation to
silently monitor an attendant conversation. If conversation monitoring is not used,
this field should be left blank.
Parking Number = 7000
The OAI monitored number assigned to MCS. It can be defined on the PBX MAT
using the command AMNO. The default value should be changed to a monitored
number defined on the PBX. This value must be assigned correctly or the MCS will
not go on-line.
Announcement Message # = 0
The number of the announcement trunk (ANT) as configured on the PBX to which
all parked calls are to be parked. If an ANT is not to be used, this field should be set
to 0.
Park Call Timeout = 60 seconds
MCS checks the call parking queue periodically. Any call parked for longer than
this period of time is recalled.
Note:

Page 32

The caller could stay parked approximately 30 to 45 seconds longer than the Park
Call Timeout since the database checks are periodic, to avoid excessive system loads.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Park Abandon Timeout = 1800
The amount of time that park records remain in the MCS database after the party
has been recalled or released. This time period is also measured in seconds and is
checked in the same way as the Park Call Timeout.
Recall Timeout = 90
This value is used by MCS to determine if a call answered by an attendant has been
recalled by the PBX. This value should be adjusted according to the value
configured in the PBX for recalls. It should be roughly equal to the amount of time
set up for recalls in the PBX plus the amount of time it takes an attendant to answer
the recall.
MCMP Queue Maximum = 10
The maximum number of messages allowed on the MCS IPC queue at any given
time. Do not change this value without first consulting an NEC representative.
MCMP Queue Load = 5
The maximum number of messages that can be outstanding for an attendant process
at any given time.
MCMP Queue Key = 9009
The IPC queue used by the MCS attendant processes.
Max Stations in Recall List = 100
The maximum number of stations that can be in the circular recall list maintained
by the MCS. This variable directly affects IPC shared memory structures used by
the MCS. It should not be changed while the MCS system is running. Do not change
this value without first consulting an NEC representative.
Max Trunks in Recall List = 200
The maximum number of trunks that are stored in the circular recall list maintained
by the MCS. This variable directly affects IPC shared memory structures used by
the MCS. It should not be changed while the system is running. Do not change this
value without first consulting an NEC representative.
This completes the database support in the APM. Now go to MAT Assignments on
page 34 to make the necessary MAT assignments.

Page 33

NDA-30026 Revision 6

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

MAT Assignments
This guide assumes that data settings that affect the operation of all OAI software on a
system-wide basis have already been assigned on the NEAX Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT). Such settings include system index values and
assignment of Interface I/O Port Data in the Interface Processor (IP). For more
information about these system data settings and the MAT commands described below,
refer to the OAI Module Installation Manual for the NEAX2400 IMS.
AMNO – Assignment of Monitored Number
MCS uses one OAI Monitored Number for use in parking calls. Failure to assign
this number correctly prevents the MCS from establishing communication with the
PBX.
ASAT – Assignment of Attendant Data
Each MCS attendant console must be assigned a unique station number. For
instance, ATT #1 may have 3100, ATT #2 may have 3101, etc. Use this command
to assign a number to each advanced attendant console.
This completes the MAT assignments. Now go to Attendant Station Preparation on
page 35 to configure the Attendant Stations.

Page 34

NDA-30026 Revision 6

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Attendant Station Preparation
To Configure
Attendant
Stations

From one of the configured terminals, log into the MCS by entering the login name mcs
at the SCO UNIX login prompt and press Enter. The following screen displays from
which you can enter the MCS Main Menu:
Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Medical Center System
*** NEC Proprietary ***
Position:
Login Name:
Password:

 to accept,  to quit

Figure 2-17 MCS Login Screen

Press  for the position data. The following error prompt will display at the
bottom of the screen:

Enter Offline Maintenance Mode? (Y/N)
At the prompt, enter Y and press .
Type MCS in the Login Name field and MCS in the Password field to log in as the
supervisor. When the MCS Main Menu displays, perform the following tasks in the
order shown:
1. Select the System Administration option, then the Extension Maintenance option, and then the Attendant Console Extensions option. This sequence displays
the Attendant Console Extensions data entry screen for input. Add the extension
numbers that have been assigned to the attendant consoles through the ASAT command at the NEAX MAT.
After all of the attendant console extensions have been entered, exit to the MCS Main
Menu. Select the Database Administration option and then the Attendant Stations
option, displaying the Attendant Station data entry screen for input of a configuration
for each attendant. Each record requires the attendant ID (1-16), the extension just
configured for that attendant (via the MAT and System Administration option), and the
name of the terminal used by that station. Note that when entering terminal names, /
dev/ preceded the name.

Page 35

NDA-30026 Revision 6

SERVER INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page 36

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 3

JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION

JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION

Overview
This chapter provides step-by-step procedures to install and configure the JAVA
MCS Client application. Descriptions and step-by-step instructions are found in the
following sections of this chapter:
The JAVA MCS Client software can be installed on the workstations used by
JAVA MCS agents to assist them in processing calls. This element can be installed
on any workstation that is networked and connected to the JAVA MCS Server.

Installing the JAVA MCS Client
Use the following steps to install the JAVA MCS Client software:
1. Access the NEC UNIX OAI Applications site from your web browser. The
address for your NEC UNIX OAI Application site consists of your UAP name
and your domain name.
For example, if your UAP name is “myuap” and your domain name is
“mydomain.com”, then enter “myuap.mydomain.com” to access the UNIX
OAI Applications Page, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 NEC UNIX OAI Applications Installation Page

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 37

JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

2. Select Download Java1.2.2 Runtime Environment from the “Getting Help”
section to install the Java Runtime Environment on your workstation. Follow
the prompt to install the Java Runtime Environment. Run the program from its
current location, then select Yes. After the Java Runtime Environment
installation is complete, the NEC UNIX OAI Applications Installation Page
(Figure 3-1) is again displayed.
3. Select the JAVA MCS Client from the “Install OAI Apps From Web” section
to begin installing the JAVA MCS Client. A security warning message will
display, click Yes to continue. The Java Virtual Machine option dialog box
(Figure 3-2) is displayed.

Figure 3-2 Java Virtual Machine option dialog box

Page 38

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION

4. Select the I want to search my system for existing Virtual Machines option.
The Searching for VMs dialog box (Figure 3-3) is displayed.

Figure 3-3 Searching for VMs dialog box

The installation program searches for installed virtual machines and displays
the installed virtual machines in the window.
Select the virtual machine, then click OK.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 39

JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

The application is installed to the default directory. A progress indicator in
the browser window indicates how much of the installation is complete, as
shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Installing Application progress indicator

5. When the virtual machine installation is done, click OK. The Welcome dialog
box (Figure 3-5) is displayed.

Figure 3-5 Welcome dialog box

Page 40

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION

6. Click Next to start the installation. A progress indicator shows how much of
the installation is complete, as shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Installing Files progress indicator

7. When the installation program is finished, the Installation Complete dialog box
(Figure 3-7) is displayed.

Figure 3-7 Installation Complete dialog box

8. Click Finish and close your browser window. The JAVA MCS Client is now installed. Refer to the MCS (JAVA Edition) User Guide for more information
about the JAVA MCS Client application.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 41

JAVA MCS CLIENT INSTALLATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page 42

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 4

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Login
An operator or supervisor must login by entering MCS at the UNIX prompt. This
login displays the MCS password entry screen where access security is
implemented.
Medical Center System

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

*** NEC Proprietary ***
Login Name:
Password:

 to accept,  to quit

Figure 4-1 Password Entry

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 43

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Screen Format
The MCS Telnet Main Menu is illustrated below in Figure 4-2. The screen parts that
are common to all levels of the menu hierarchy are identified in the figure and are
described below:

(a)

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Main Menu ***

Operator Functions
Database Administration

(b)

System Administration
Configuration Management
Login Name Maintenance
Supervisor Reports
Quit

(c)

(d)

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit

Attendant Status

Call Status

Trnfr
D

MCS Status

S

Figure 4-2 Screen Format

(a) Header – The top line contains the name of the menu system (Medical Center
System), identification of the attendant console (in this case, Supervisor), and a time
and date notation that is periodically updated. This line remains the same no matter
what kind of changes take place in the rest of the screen.
(b) Interactive Window – This is the working area of the screen in which several
different formats are displayed, including lists of choices, data input windows, and
information displays. When the Operator Functions option is selected from the
Main Menu, this area is further divided into multiple areas for Source Caller and
Destination information.
(c) Command Line – Some menus contain action choices in this area of the screen
(Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit). Other menus display
a set of available commands (e.g., DirAsst, Park, Join/Rtrv, Beeper, Redial, Emerg,
Clear, and Quit commands on the Operator Functions screen).
(d) Status Area – The bottom area of the screen contains labeled areas in which
information about the attendant, status of the current call, the type of transfer in
effect, and the current MCS system status displays.

Page 44

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Selecting Operator Functions
Select the Operator Functions option from the MCS Main Menu to display the
Operator screen, making MCS call processing functions accessible to the operator. If
the operator is not set up for database capabilities, type the operator password at the
login prompt to display the Operator screen directly.

***

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Attendant - 1

Medical Center System

Main Menu ***

Operator Functions
Database Administration
(2)
Quit
Attendant-1

Medical Center System
Destination Name

Ext

DID

Tue

Room

Bed

Unit

Aug

Age

17

Sx

09:02 am
Admit

Dsch

Destination
Area

DirAsst

Park

Join/Rtrv
Ext

Source Name

DID

Beeper

Redial

Room

Bed

Emerg
Unit

Clear
Age

Quit
Sx

Admit

Dsch

Source
Area

Status
Area

Attendant Status

Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-line

Figure 4-3 Operator Screen

On the Operator screen, the interactive window is divided into the Destination and
Source areas. The Status area at the bottom of the screen shows the status of MCS
operator functions. These areas are discussed below, as they relate to operator activity.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 45

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Status Area

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

The following sections in the status area display information about the current call
processing environment.

MCS Status Window
This window in the bottom right corner of the screen displays the operational status of
the MCS system. Whenever there is a change in status, the new status notation replaces
the old, and a beep is sounded on the CRT. Any of the following notations can be
displayed:
On-line:

The OAI that enables communication between the attendant console and
the CRT is initialized; the MCS and NEAX2400 are in full
communication, with all screen functions available; and call events at this
station are now being monitored. This is the normal status when the user
enters the Operator Functions option.

Dir off:

The Directory Assistance, beeper, and emergency functions are not
operational, but Park/Retrieve is available.

Park off:

The Park/Retrieve functions are not operational, but Directory Assistance
and the other command functions are available.

Off-line:

The OAI is not initialized, so the attendant console is operating
independently of the MCS CRT. In this status, the operator can perform
directory searches and message operations but not automated call
processing. Therefore, all call placement functions must take place
through the attendant console. When OAI functions are restored, the Offline notation is replaced with a message showing a change in status, and
the CRT beeps once. Operations can then be carried out normally with the
degree of automated call placement shown by the new status.

Attendant Status Window
This window on the bottom left corner of the screen is reserved for real-time messages
that relate directly to attendant-to-attendant communications. For instance, when a call
is transferred between attendants, this area displays the message “Call transfer from
Att-3”. This area also displays attendant supervisor alerts and error conditions that
require special attention. Messages in this area clarify any events that affect the
attendant console and communications among the attendants.

Call Status Window
The Call Status Window displays messages about all current call events. For example,
an incoming call from an extension with more than one patient in the room generates a
message here. The message “Extension Busy” shows an attempt to perform a Directory
Assistance transfer to an off-hook extension.

Page 46

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Trnfr Window
This window at the bottom right of the screen allows operators to toggle between the
following types of transfers:
Screened (S): Places the source caller on hold with music while the operator call is
being placed to the destination number. The operator hears a ring-back
tone (RBT) while the destination station phone is ringing. The operator
is connected to the destination station when it is answered. Thereafter
the operator may use the SRC, DST, TALK, CNCL, or Release keys to
manipulate the call.
Direct (D):

Causes the source caller to hear a RBT while the destination station
phone is ringing. The operator is automatically disconnected from both
parties, and the source caller is directly connected to the destination
party without operator screening of the transfer.

The default transfer type is configurable through the Configuration Management
option on the Supervisor Main Menu. The type of transfer currently in effect is
highlighted.

Source Area

When the attendant console is on-line, MCS monitors all incoming calls. As each
incoming call is answered, MCS automatically performs a database search for the
dialed number. If the number is found, any information associated with it in the
database displays in the Source area of the screen. When more than one person is
assigned to an extension, a message showing the number of additional people is
displayed in the Call Status window. Pressing the down-arrow key displays the next
person in the list and the up-arrow key displays the previous person. The kind of
information that is displayed depends upon the source of the call, as described below.

Patient
When an operator answers a call from a patient, information about the calling patient
automatically displays below the Source Name label line if patient room extensions are
available in the database. (See Figure 4-4.) Two more lines of Source information can
be set up through the Configuration Management option on the Supervisor Main
Menu.

Source Name

Ext

Taylor, Frederick

2201

Visitors:
Comment:

DID

Room

Bed

Unit

Age

Sx

Admit

220

1

A2

62

M

08-15

Dsch

Yes
No solids until 08-17.

Attendant Status

Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-line

Figure 4-4 Patient Caller

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 47

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Staff or Non-Patient
Figure 4-5 below shows Caller information for non-patient or internal staff extensions.
The comment field consists of up to two lines of information, as set up through the
Configuration Management option on the Supervisor Main Menu.

Source Name

Ext

Dept

X-ray Department

3042

X-ray

Comment:
Comment:

Room
321

Unit

Note

3

Radiologist on-call 24 hrs/day.

Only accessible after hours with security card.
Located on 2East.

Attendant Status

Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-line

Figure 4-5 Internal Staff or Non-Patient Caller

External
Figure 4-6 shows how trunk and route information on an incoming call from an external
source is displayed. If a name for this particular trunk number has been entered in the
database or if source number information is received for the call, it is also shown under
Trunk Name. Each trunk listing contains one note field and up to two comment lines.

Trunk Name

3000

Information

Comment:
Comment:

Note

Trunk Number

Detour north parking lot Friday.

Never give out patient’s home phone or address.
Transfer to main desk if needed.

Attendant Status

Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-line

Figure 4-6 Incoming From an External Trunk

Page 48

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Destination
Area

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

The destination area of the Operator screen changes as necessary to display information
and to prompt for entry of the data that is necessary to complete a call transaction. The
command line contains the actions that can be taken. The remainder of this chapter
provides descriptions and step-by-step instructions on how to use each of these actions.
Each action is discussed in a separate section, as noted below:
Directory Assistance

–

Search the database for destination information and then
transfer internal, external, and attendant calls to the
selected destinations. (See page 50.)

Call Park

–

Place a call on an announcement trunk or a monitored
number for paging purposes. (See page 55.)

Parked Call Retrieval –

Communicate with a previously parked call.
(See page 57.)

Beeper

–

Contact a beeper-holder with a coded message.
(See page 59.)

Redial

–

Use this command during Idle status to automatically dial
the station that most recently called the operator.
(See page 61.)

Emergency

–

Select a supervisor or an expert from a displayed menu to
contact in case of emergency. (See page 62.)

Clear

–

This command removes all entries to the Destination and
Source areas.
Note:This command is not discussed further in this chapter.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 49

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Directory Assistance
Use the DirAsst command to access the MCS directory assistance database to identify
the destination of a call. This command can be selected from the Operator Screen when
it is in idle status or while the operator is connected to a source caller.

(1)

Tue

Attendant-1

Medical Center System
Ext

Destination Name

DID

Room

Bed

Unit

Aug

Age

17

Sx

09:02 am
Admit

Dsch
(2)

Enter Name or Room:

At

 to search,  to return to command line
(3)

Destination Name

DirAsst

Park

Source Name

Taylor, Frederick

Visitors:
Comment:

Ext

DID

Atherby, Jim
2303
Rtrv
Beeper
Redial
Emerg
2394
Atkinson, Kimberly
Atley, Mike
Atmondson, Darlene
Ext
Dept 2394
Room
Attison, Gary
2375
Atworth, Mark
2347
2201
A2 2419
220
Atworth, Barbara
More
Yes
No solids until 08-17.

Attendant Status

Room

Bed

Unit

345
2
Clear
Quit
247
1

3E
2E

247
Age 2
436
2
241
1
210 62 2

Sx 2E
4E
2E
M 2N

Bed
1

Enter Name or Room:

Age

Sx

Admit

14
25
68
43
Adm
34
47
08-1542

M
F
M
F
Dsch
M
M
F

08-16
08-13
08-10
08-13
08-16
08-15
08-15

Dsch

08-12

At

Up/Down Arrows to select,  to transfer,  to expand,  to quit
Call Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
D

S

On-line

Figure 4-7 Directory Assistance

General
Process

When a call is answered, the Source Name area automatically displays any information
available on that calling number. Selection of the DirAsst command displays a prompt
for a name or a room number to be used as a database search pattern. You can enter all
or part of the name or number. MCS displays a list of matches from which the desired
destination can be selected and the call transferred.
Note:

Page 50

Pressing Enter on a blank field at the name or room prompt displays the full list of
destinations in the database.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Hot Key

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Instead of entering the name or room number, the operator may press the MCS Hot Key
to replace the command line with the following options. The hot key is a period (.) by
default.

Pat’s

Doc’s

Employ’s

Intrnl

Extrnl

Tests

Master

Selection of one of the options leads to a more specific search. For instance, selection
of the Patients option allows the attendant to search only among the Patient database
records. Internal refers to all extensions within the hospital phone system that are not
assigned to patients, doctors, employees, or test/procedures. External refers to all
telephone numbers that lie outside of the hospital phone system. Master refers to the
full list, including the information available through all other command options.
To change the MCS Hot Key, select the Configuration Management option from the
MCS main menu. If you enter the ampersand character (@) as the hot key character,
the sub-directory look-up screen automatically appears after the Directory function is
activated.

Directory
Information

Directory Assistance information that is displayed in the Destination window consists
of the following fields from the database:
Destination

–

A name from the database that matches the pattern entered
at the prompt; may be the names.

Name

–

Name of patients, internal departments, non-patient
extensions, external locations, or other attendants.

Ext

–

The phone extension tied to the displayed name.

Note:

No extension is displayed for patients in rooms without phones. An asterisk appears
next to an extension of a patient who has not contracted for phone service or whose
presence is confidential. To expand the record and display the reason for the ‘*’ ,
press the Tab key. Patients whose presence is confidential are displayed in a different
foreground color or, on monochrome terminals, blink.

Dept

–

The medical department in which the assigned room is
located.

Room

–

The number of the room to which the patient has been
assigned.

The Ext., Dept., Room, and Bed fields are empty in the display when a patient has been
discharged. When patient names are displayed, the following fields are also included
in the Destination window:
Bed

–

The number of the bed to which the patient has been
assigned.

Age

–

The three-digit age of the patient.

Note:

NDA-30026 Revision 6

If the patient is months or days old, the third character is either an “m” or a “d” respectively -- for example, 100, 34, 12m or 1d.

Page 51

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Special
Destinations

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Sex

–

The gender of the patient.

Adm

–

Date that the patient was admitted to the hospital, in the
format mm/dd.

Dsch

–

Date that the patient was discharged from the hospital, in
the format mm/dd.

Some destination names that are displayed from the database appear differently from
the others in the list. These names are of patients to whom calls are generally not to be
transferred. These “special” destinations are described below:
1. Extension preceded by an *: A patient who has either not paid for phone service or
wishes to have no phone calls but is in a room that contains a phone. The expanded
version of this record shows whether the patient wants to keep the number confidential or did not contract for phone service.
2. Extension field blank: If a patient has been assigned a DID, the extension number
does not display. If no extension or DID is displayed, the room cannot receive calls.
3. Record is highlighted: A patient who has expired. This patient listing will have an
x next to the Ext field.
Note:The highlighting options are selected by the user.

Expanded
Display

Press the tab key while a record in the list is highlighted to display any additional
information available about the selection. Enter and Esc are used to exit the window, and
arrow keys move the cursor within the window.

Type of
Transfer

Use the left- and right-arrow keys to select between direct or screened transfer. In a
direct transfer, press Enter to transfer the source caller to the extension that is currently
selected. This will release the operator and clear the Operator screen. In a screened
transfer, place the source caller on hold, and connect to the destination. The operator
can stay on the line as long as desired, but must release, cancel, or join the call manually
via the attendant console. Operator release causes the source and destination parties to
be connected.

Operator
Transfer

Any time a call is transferred between two operators, the source information shown on
the original operator’s screen is transferred to the recipient operator when the call is
answered. A message that is displayed in the Attendant Status window shows when the
transfer has taken place.

Page 52

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Transfer
Failures

Transfers to patients that have been discharged will always fail. Transfers also fail if
the destination station is busy or set to Do Not Disturb. If a transfer fails, the Call Status
window displays an error message, and the search list remains displayed.

Off-Line Mode

If the OAI connection between the attendant console and the CRT is down for any
reason, the Directory Assistance functions perform as usual, except that when you
press Enter to transfer a call, a message displays showing that the system is off-line,
and the call is not transferred. The system displays the destination number information,
but the call must be placed manually via the actual console. The destination menu is
only cleared by selection of the Clear command. Once the OAI is reestablished, all
functions return to normal.

Key Function
Summary

Below is a list of the typical functions of the support keys:

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Enter

–

Begins the designated action (e.g., search or transfer).

Up/down arrows

–

Moves the highlight up and down the list for selection
purposes; also scrolls the list up and down for display on
the screen.

Right/left arrows

–

Select the type of transfer (i.e., direct or screened).

Esc

–

Returns the cursor to the previous position (e.g., from
displayed search results back to name or number prompt).

Tab

–

Opens a window display of additional information about
the current selection.

Hot Key

–

When pressed while at the “Enter Name or Room” prompt
during Directory Assistance, replaces the command line
with options for specific directory searches.

Page 53

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Procedure

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Although possible destinations of a call may vary (i.e., a patient, physician, location, or
test), the following procedure for transferring a call is the same for all destinations:
Action

After an incoming call is answered and
source information displays, type d to
select the DirAsst command. (1)

Result

The “Enter Name or Room:” prompt
displays and highlights for data entry. (2)

Type all or part of the name or room number All of the matching records in the database
to be called and press Enter. To display all display. (3)
names and their room numbers, press Enter
on the blank entry field.
If desired destination is displayed in list:
Using the up- and down-arrow keys, move The transfer begins, according to the type of
the highlight to the desired name or number. transfer shown in the Trnfr Window:
If more than one screen full of names are
• Direct – the attendant console and
found, press the down arrow to scroll the
screen are automatically released from
list upwards and the up arrow to scroll the
the call and cleared of all information
list downwards. Press Enter to begin
concerning it.
transfer of the call to the chosen destination.
• Screened – the call must be manually
released, joined, or cancelled. If the call
Expand Current Selection: Press the Tab
is cancelled or joined, the source
key to display any additional information
information stays on the screen until a
available about the current selection in a
new source caller displays or you select
window that is positioned over the list.
the Clear command.
(Press the Enter, up or down arrows, or Esc
key to exit the expansion window.)
If desired destination is not displayed in
list:
Begin entering data to append to the
All of the matching records in the database
existing pattern, or press Ctrl w to erase the display.
existing entry. Type a new search pattern
and press Enter.
Use the up- and down-arrow keys as
described above to select the destination,
and press Enter to transfer the call.

Page 54

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Call Park
Use the Park command to place a source call on an announcement trunk or a monitored
number for paging purposes. Activating the Park command from the Operator Screen
displays the Call Parking window. Remember, the Source area of the screen contains
information about the caller.

Attendant-1

Medical Center System
Destination Name

Ext

DID

***

Room

Tue
Bed

Call Parking

Unit

Aug

Age

17

09:02 am

Sx

Admit

Dsch

Dsch

***

Page Name:
Parked Name:

Taylor, Frederick

Park Method:

Meet_Me Page

Operator Assist

 to park,  to quit

Source Name

Ext

Taylor, Frederick

2201

Visitors:
Comment:

DID

Room

Bed

Unit

Age

Sx

Admit

220

1

A2

62

M

08-15

Yes
No solids until 08-17.

Attendant Status

Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-line

Figure 4-8 Call Park Function

General
Process

To park an incoming call select the Park command, enter the name of the party to be
paged, and press Enter. The cursor moves to the Parked Name field and can be
changed if required. If the field does not need to be changed, press Enter. The cursor
moves to the Park Method field and the configured default park method is highlighted.
Press the Space Bar to change the park method, or press Enter to select the default
method. The attendant is released to either page the called party or receive the next
incoming call. The name of the party being paged is entered as the call identifier. If the
Directory Assistance window is open, press Esc to return to the command line and then
select the Park command.
The Meet_Me Page park method displays a station number that the Paged party must
dial to be connected with the party being parked. This method removes the attendant
from the park connection process. The Operator Assist method requires the Paged party
to call the attendant. With this method, the attendant must find and connect the paged
and parked parties manually.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 55

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Park Recall

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

If the Park Recall feature is activated during MCS installation, the attendant who
originally parked a call is notified when a parked call times out. MCS automatically
transfers the parked call from the monitored number or announcement trunk back to the
original attendant, and beeps the CRT once. The message “Parked Call Time-out [#]”
flashes in the Attendant Status window until the call is either answered or abandoned.
When the call is answered, the Call Window displays a message showing that it is a
recall.
If another parked call for the same attendant times out during this process, another beep
is sounded and the number in the brackets of the message increases by one. The calls
are returned to the attendant and are answered in a first-come, first-serve order. The
message remains on display until all timed-out parked calls have either abandoned or
been answered. Any other messages that must be displayed in the Attendant Status
window replace the time-out message temporarily, but the time-out message returns in
blinking display when the other messages clear. If the original attendant is no longer
on-line, the next on-line attendant is notified of the timed-out parked call.

Cancel and Exit

Pressing the Esc key at any time cancels the call park function and returns control to
the display from which the Call Parking window was opened. However, escaping the
Call Parking window, however, does not release the source caller. The release must be
done from the attendant console.

Procedure
Action

After an incoming call is answered and
source information displays, type p to
select the Park command.

Result

The Call Parking window displays.

Type the name to be paged and press Enter. If the call is from an internal extension:
The source caller is parked on an
announcement trunk, information about the
parked call is placed in the database, and
Note: Use the Up/Down arrows to move as the operator screen is released and cleared.
necessary between the two fields in
the Call Parking window.

If the call is from an external number:
The cursor is placed in the Parked Name
field for data entry. A new entry can be
made to the field, any name already
displayed can remain, or the field can be
left blank. Press Enter to accept the field as
displayed, park the source caller, and clear
the screen.

Select a park method, either Meet_Me Page The Meet_Me Page park method displays a
or Operator Assist.
station number that the Paged party must
dial to be connected with the parked party.
With the Operator Assist method, the
Paged party must call the attendant, and the
attendant connects the parties manually.

Page 56

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Parked Call Retrieval
Use the Join/Rtrv command to communicate with a previously parked caller.
Selection of the Join/Rtrv command from the Operator Screen displays Park Retrieval
information in the destination area and information about the station used by the paged
caller in the Source area.

Paged

(1)

Attendant-1

Medical Center System

Parked

Tue
PgNo

Aug

17

Status

09:02 am
Att

Time

(2)

Tal

Enter Paged Name:

 to search,  to return to command line
Paged
Allen, Chris
Bright, Mical
Green, Mrs.
Miller
Extension
Milke, Kim

Source Name
Lobby House Phone

Comment:

Parked

12

30421
00002
Talbot, Lisa

Mostly used in emergencies.

Attendant Status

PgNO

Status

Time

Att

RLS

:15
:45
1:20
:05
2:05

2
1
4
1
2

1:40

5

Rault, Jeremy
Room

Note
Collins, Joanna

Next to security
station
Smith,
Terry

Enter Paged Name:

(3)

Tal

Up/Down Arrows to select,  to retrieve,  to quit
Call Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
D

S

On-line

Figure 4-9 Parked Call Retrieval

General
Process

To retrieve a parked call, select the Join/Rtrv command and enter the name of the
paged party at the displayed prompt. MCS searches among the parked calls for the
paged party and displays an alphabetical listing of matches. (Press Enter on a blank
prompt field to display the entire list of parked calls.) Select the name from among
those displayed in alphabetical order to begin the transfer.

Retrieve from
Idle Screen

The procedure for retrieving a parked call from an idle screen (no incoming call) is the
same as from a screen displaying source caller information on an incoming call.
However, after the operator presses Enter, the caller is routed to either the attendant
requesting the park retrieve or to the priority key, depending upon how MCS was
configured during installation. The attendant then answers the call.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 57

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Park Call
Abandon

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

If a call is abandoned while it is parked, it still appears in the list of parked calls for a
preset amount of time. When the Park Retrieval function is activated, the display of any
call that has abandoned includes a time notation in the Time field that shows when the
party abandoned the call, and the Status field displays RLS. MCS automatically
removes the call listing from the display after a time-out. As long as the list is on
display, the deleted call remains on the list. When the list is exited and displayed again,
the call no longer appears on the list.
With Meet_Me Page park method, the paged party will be connected with the operator
if the parked party abandons before being connected with the paged party.

Cancel and Exit

Press the Esc key at any time to cancel the call park retrieval function and return control
to the display from which the retrieval was begun. If the operator exits the Call Park
Retrieval window using the Esc key, the paged caller is not released. The release must
be done from the attendant console.

Procedure

Action

Result

After an incoming call is answered and
The “Enter Paged Name:” prompt displays
source information displays, type j to select and highlights for data entry. (2)
the Join/Rtrv command. (1)
Type part or all of the name of the paged
All of the matching extensions in the
party and press Enter. To display all names database display. (3)
and their room numbers, press Enter when
the blank entry field is highlighted.
Using the up- and down-arrow keys, move The join is begun according to the type of
the highlight to the desired name. If more transfer shown in the Trnfr Window.
than one screen full of names are found,
• If Direct, the attendant console and
press the down- arrow key to scroll the list
screen are automatically released from
upwards and the up- arrow key to scroll the
the call and cleared of all information
list downwards. Press Enter to begin
about it.
transferring the call.
• If Screened, the parked and paged
parties are connected only when the call
is manually released via the attendant
console.

Page 58

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Beeper
Use the Beeper command to place a call to a specified beeper number and to display
codes that can be manually entered once a connection is established with the beeper
holder.

Destination Name

Tue

Attendant-1

Medical Center System

Extension

City, St

Enter Person to Beep:

Aug

17

09:02 am

Status

Room

Person
Jones, Dr. Wayne

Beeper No.
1235

Saunders, Dr. Paul
Teague, Harold
Lee, Steve

3462
7834
9435

(1)

Date
(2)

Bottom

Enter Person to Beep:
Arrows
to move,
 to search,  to Up/Down
return to
command
line  to call,  to quit
Source Name

City, St

Taylor, Frederick

2201

Visitors:
Comment:

Yes
No solids until 08-17.

Attendant Status

Top Room
of File
A2

220

Bed

Age

1
62
Beeper Code Name
Blue Alert
Call Clinic
Call Office
Call Home

Call
End of
FileStatus
DownPage

Sx
Adm
Dsch
*** Beeper Codes ***
M

08-15
Beeper Code
2222
3333
4444
5555

Trnfr
UpPage

(3)

Search
S
D

MCS Status
Top

Bottom
On-line

Print

Quit

Figure 4-10 Beeper Function

General
Process

NDA-30026 Revision 6

When you select the Beeper command, a prompt displays for the name of the person
to be beeped. When you type all or part of the name at the prompt, a list of names
displays with the beeper number associated to each name. Use the arrow keys to
position the highlight on the desired beeper and press Enter to attempt the call. If the
beeper call is successful, a list of codes representing various call types displays on the
screen. Type the code that describes the purpose of the beep and press Enter. Press Esc
to exit the screen.

Page 59

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Procedure

Action

Type b to select the Beeper command.

Result

The “Enter Person to Beep:” prompt
displays and highlights for data entry. (1)

Type part or all of the name of the person to All of the matching extensions in the
be beeped and press Enter. To display all database display. (2)
names and associated room numbers, press
Enter when the blank entry field
highlights.
Using the up- and down-arrow keys, move The beeper code list displays, containing
the highlight to the desired name. Then,
codes and their definitions. (3)
manually call the selected beeper number
and press Enter.
Use the DownPage command to move
forward one page, the UpPage command to
move back one page, the Top command to
move to the beginning of the display, and
the Bottom command to move to the end of
the display.
Search the Display: Type s to select the
Search command and press Enter. Then
type the desired pattern and again press
Enter.

All occurrences of the pattern shown on
that page highlight in the display.

Print the Display: Type p to select the Print The printing is performed and the display
command. To print the entire file of codes, command line returns.
type f and press Enter. To print only the
current screen display, type s and press
Enter. Press Esc to cancel the print request
and return to the previous command line.
To exit the Beeper Code list, type q (quit).

Page 60

The Operator screen displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Redial
Use the Redial command to place a call to the last caller received by the attendant.

Attendant-1

Medical Center System
Destination Name

DirAsst

Ext

Park

Join/Rtrv

DID

Room

Beeper

Redial

Ext

Source Name

Dept

Room

Source Name

Ext

Taylor, Frederick

2201

Attendant Status

Visitors:
Comment:

Tue
Bed

Unit

Aug

Age

Sx

Emerg

Clear

Quit

Bed

Age

Sx

DID

17

(1)

09:02 am
Admit

Dsch

Adm

Dsch

(2)

Room

Bed

Unit

Age

Sx

Admit

220

1

A2

62

M

08-15

Yes
Call08-17.
Status
No solids until

Attendant Status

Trnfr
Call

S
D
Status

Dsch

MCS Status
On-line Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-line

Figure 4-11 Redial Function

General
Process

An operator may activate the Redial function any time the station is idle (not connected
to a caller). The MCS maintains a record of the last incoming call for this purpose. If
the called extension is busy or the attendant console is connected with another party
when this function is selected, the operation fails, and an error message displays.

Procedure
Action

Type e to select the Redial command. (1)

Result

Connection is made to the last caller
received by the attendant. If connection is
successful, information about that caller is
displayed in the Source Name area. (2)

Refer to the instructions corresponding to
the service that is requested by the caller.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 61

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Emergency
Use the Emerg command to contact either a “specialist” or the supervisor while
connected to a source caller.

(1)
Attendant-1

Medical Center System
Problem

Tue

Extension

Aug

17

09:02 am

Alternate

Note

(2)
Extension

Problem
Bleeding from wound
Can’t breathe
Chest pain
Enter Problem:
Beginning of Labor
Poison ingestion
 to search, 
to return to command line
Supervisor
Suspected broken bone
Ext

Source Name

Dept

More

Room

Alternate

1002

1213

1834
1641
1242
6000
3990
1354

1837
1642
1245
3576
3991
1352

Bed

Age

Advice
Tourniquet/pressure/cold; come to ER
Check passageway
Lie down, breathe slowly; ambulance
Check timing; call OB
Hold for Poison Control; ID substance
Immobilize, come to ER
Sx

Adm

Dsch

Enter Problem:

Up/Down Arrows to select,  to transfer,  to expand,  to quit

Attendant Status

Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-line

Figure 4-12 Emergency Function

General Process

You can activate the Emergency function any time during interaction with a source
caller. When activated, the Emergency function displays a prompt for a brief name
or description of the presenting problem. The matches from a directory of
emergencies display when you enter a name or description. From this displayed
directory, select either the problem shown and the extension(s) associated with it
or the supervisor entry. The results of these selections are described below:
Problem:

MCS attempts a conference call to the extension shown for the
selected problem. If the extension is busy, the alternate extension is
called. A three-way conference call is automatically established when
the specialist answers the call.

Supervisor: An alert message (e.g., Att3 Supervisor Alert) is broadcast in the
Attendant Status window at all active stations, and the Supervisor
Dterm rings. Silent monitoring of the call begins when the supervisor
answers, and the attendant is notified that the supervisor is listening to
the call. At the same time, the supervisor’s CRT displays the same
source and destination information currently displayed on the alerting
attendant’s CRT.

Page 62

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Supervisor
Equipment

The station from which the supervisor monitors calls must be equipped with a
Dterm V. The Dterm can be configured to ring automatically whether or not the
supervisor is logged in. When the Dterm is configured to ring automatically,
conversation monitoring begins as soon as the phone is answered.

Supervisor
Capability

If the supervisor is already connected to a call when monitoring is enabled, the
source information on the alerting attendant console is not displayed until the
supervisor releases the call. The MCS can also be set up to have all monitored calls
connected to a dictation trunk that begins recording at the same time that the call
monitoring begins.

Expanded Display

Press the tab key while a record in the displayed list is highlighted. This will display
any more information available about this selection in a window positioned over the
list. Use the arrow keys to move within the window. Use the Enter and Esc keys to
exit the window.

Procedure

Action

Type m to select the Emerg command.

Result

The “Enter Problem:” prompt displays and
highlights for data entry. (1)

Type the problem and press Enter. To
All of the matching problems in the
display all names and associated room
database display. (2)
numbers, press Enter when the cursor is on
the blank entry field.
For an emergency problem:
Using the up- and down-arrow keys, move A call is begun to the extension tied to the
the highlight to the appropriate problem and problem. (OAI key lamps blink and a chime
press Enter.
rings.) When the call is answered, the
specialist joins the emergency call, making
it a three-way conference call.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 63

TELNET OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Action

Result

For a supervisor alert:

The Attendant Status window of all stations
displays a supervisor alert notation. If set up
Using the up- and down-arrow keys, move to do so, the supervisor’s Dterm
the highlight to the supervisor record and
automatically rings.
press Enter.
As soon as the supervisor answers the
ringing Dterm:
1) The supervisor connects to the
initiating operator’s call in silent
monitoring mode.
2) The message “Supervisor Monitoring”
displays in the initiating operator’s
Attendant Status window.
3) The supervisor’s Dterm LCD displays
the message “Monitoring Att ##”.
4) The source and destination information
The supervisor can stop listening in on (and
displays on both the attendant and
recording) the conversation at any time by
supervisor CRT.
hanging up.
Release the call manually. If no other
incoming call displays, use the Clear
command to remove the previous call
information from the screen.

Page 64

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 5

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Login
1. From the workstation desktop, double-click the JAVA Client icon to start the
JAVA MCS application. The Password Entry screen (Figure 5-1) will be displayed.

Figure 5-1 Password Entry Screen

2. Enter your assigned operator or supervisor login name in the Login Name field.
(If you do not have an assigned name, see your system administrator.)
3. Enter your password in the Password field, and select the OK button. (If you
do not have a password, see your system administrator.) The JAVA MCS main
screen (Figure 5-2) will be displayed.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 65

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Screen Format
The JAVA MCS main screen is illustrated below (Figure 5-2). The major screen
components are identified in the figure and described below.

(A)
(B)

(C)

(D)
(E)
(F)
Figure 5-2 JAVA MCS Main Screen

Screen Components

Page 66

(A)

Menu Bar – Provides access to operator, directory database and administrator functions.

(B)

Header – Displays the name of the application (Medical Center System),
identification of the workstation position, and the current system time and
date.

(C)

Call Destination Panel – Directory list and detailed information of selected
destination caller.

(D)

Tool Bar/Command Buttons – Command buttons (also showing keyboard
Hot Key) to select the operator functions.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

(E)

Call Source Information Panel – This panel displays source caller information including status of the current call and any transfer information.

(F)

Status Panel - Displays the Attendant status, current call status, type of
transfer and current MCS system status.

These panels and associated functions are further described in the following sections of this manual.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 67

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Selecting Operator Functions
After user login, the JAVA MCS Operator screen is displayed (Figure 5-2). Access
to Administration functions are dependant on the privileges of the user. The
Operator screen is divided into Status, Call Source and Call Destination areas.
These are described in the following sections.

Status Area

The Operator screen Status Area displays information about the attendant, current
call processing and the MCS system. A detail of the Operator screen Status Area is
shown below (Figure 5-3):

Figure 5-3 Operator Screen - Status Area

Attendant Status Window
This window on the bottom left corner of the screen is reserved for real-time
messages that relate directly to attendant-to-attendant communications. For
instance, when a call is transferred between attendants, this area displays the
message “Call transfer from Att-3”. This area also displays attendant supervisor
alerts and error conditions that require special attention. Messages in this area
clarify any events that affect the attendant console and communications among the
attendants.

Call Status Window
The Call Status Window displays messages about all current call events. For
example, an incoming call from an extension with more than one patient in the
room generates a message here. The message “Extension Busy” shows an attempt
to perform a Directory Assistance transfer to an off-hook extension.

Transfer Window
This window at the bottom right of the screen allows operators to toggle between
the following types of transfers:
Screened (S): Places the source caller on hold with music while the operator call
is being placed to the destination number. The operator hears a
ring-back tone (RBT) while the destination station phone is
ringing. The operator is connected to the destination station when
it is answered. Thereafter the operator may use the SRC, DST,
TALK, CNCL, or Release keys on the console to manipulate the
call.

Page 68

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Direct (D):

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Causes the source caller to hear a RBT while the destination station
phone is ringing. The operator is automatically disconnected from
both parties, and the source caller is directly connected to the
destination party without operator screening of the transfer.

The default transfer type is configurable through the Configuration Management
option on the Supervisor Main Menu. The type of transfer currently in effect is
highlighted.

MCS Status Window
This window in the bottom right corner of the screen displays the operational status
of the MCS system. Whenever there is a change in status, the new status notation
replaces the old, and a beep is sounded on the CRT. Any of the following notations
can be displayed:

NDA-30026 Revision 6

On-line:

The OAI that enables communication between the attendant console
and the UAP is initialized; the MCS and NEAX2400 are in full
communication, with all screen functions available; and call events at
this station are now being monitored. This is the normal status when
the user enters the Operator Functions option.

Dir off:

The Directory Assistance, beeper, and emergency functions are not
operational, but Park/Retrieve is available.

Park off:

The Park/Retrieve functions are not operational, but Directory
Assistance and the other command functions are available.

Off-line:

The OAI is not initialized, so the attendant console is operating
independently of the PBX. In this status, the operator can perform
directory searches and message operations but not automated call
processing. Therefore, all call placement functions must take place
manually through the attendant console. When OAI functions are
restored, the Off-line notation is replaced with a message showing a
change in status, and the CRT beeps once. Operations can then be
carried out normally with the degree of automated call placement
shown by the new status.

Page 69

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Source Area

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

When the attendant console is on-line, MCS monitors all incoming calls. As each
incoming call is answered, MCS automatically performs a database search for the
dialed number. If the number is found, any information associated with it in the
database displays in the Source area (Figure 5-4) of the screen.

Figure 5-4 Operator Screen - Call Source Area

When more than one person is assigned to an extension, a message showing the
number of additional people is displayed in the Call Status window. Pressing the
down-arrow key displays the next person in the list and the up-arrow key displays
the previous person. The kind of information that is displayed depends upon the
source of the call.

Destination Area

The Destination area (Figure 5-5) of the Operator screen changes as necessary to
display information and to prompt for entry of the data that is necessary to
complete a call transaction. The command line contains the actions that can be
taken.

Figure 5-5 Operator Screen - Call Destination Area

Page 70

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

The remainder of this chapter provides descriptions and step-by-step instructions
on how to use each of these actions. Each action is discussed in a separate section,
as noted below:
Directory Assistance

–

Search the database for destination information and
then transfer internal, external, and attendant calls to
the selected destinations. (See page 72.)

Make Call

–

Attempt to place a call from the attendant console to
the selected directory entry.

Transfer

–

After receiving a call at the attendant console, the
attendant can transfer the call to a selected destination
directory entry.

Call Park

–

Place a call on an announcement trunk or a monitored
number for paging purposes. (See page 77.)

Parked Call Retrieval –

Communicate with a previously parked call.
(See page 80.)

Beeper

–

Contact a beeper-holder with a coded message.
(See page 82.)

Redial

–

Use this command during Idle status to automatically
dial the station that most recently called the operator.
(See page 83.)

Clear

–

This command removes all entries to the Destination
and Source areas.
Note:This command is not discussed further in this chapter.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 71

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Directory Assistance
The directory assistance options (Figure 5-6) allow the operator to locate a specific
destination entry in a database directory.

Figure 5-6 Operator Screen - Directory Assistance

General Process

The operator can select a specific directory type (Patient, Doctor, Employee,
Internal, External and Master) from a pull-down menu (see Figure 5-6). The Call
Destination area display will change depending on the type of directory selected.
The selected directory can be further searched by moving the cursor to the Name,
Room or Phone fields where specific information can be entered. All or any part
of the name or number can be entered. Following a search, use the UP and DOWN
arrow keys to select a specific directory entry.
When a specific entry is selected, the operator can then make a call or transfer a
source call to the selected destination entry. With a pending source call, pressing
the ENTER key on a selected destination entry will transfer the call.

Page 72

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Directory
Information

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Directory Assistance information displayed in the Destination area is dependent on
the type of directory selected. A listing for a selected directory or directory search
is displayed in the left of the Destination area (see Figure 5-6). When an entry is
selected, further information detail for the entry is shown on the right of the
Destination area. The various information fields in the directory listings are defined
below:

Patient Directory
• Patient

– The Patient’s name.

• Site

– Abbreviation for a facility site or location of the patient room.

• Extn

– The phone extension number of the patient room.

Note:

The Extn field is empty in the display when a patient has been discharged. No
extension is displayed for patients in rooms without phones. An asterisk appears
next to an extension of a patient who has not contracted for phone service or is
restricted. Patients whose presence is confidential are displayed in a different
foreground color, and may also display a ‘C’ in the column after the name. (Also
see “Special Destinations” on page 74.)

• DID

– The Direct Inward Dialed number of the patient.

• Room

– The room number assigned to the patient.

• Dschrg

– Date that the patient was discharged, in the format mm/dd.

Doctor Directory
• Physician – The physician’s name.
• Site

– Abbreviation for a facility site or location of the doctor.

• Office

– The phone number of the doctor’s office.

Employee Directory
• Employee – The employee’s name.
• Site

– Abbreviation for a facility site or location of the employee.

• Extn

– The phone extension number assigned to the employee.

Internal Directory

NDA-30026 Revision 6

• Internal

– The name of an Internal department, group, function, service,
or other person within the facility.

• Site

– Abbreviation for a facility site or location of the Internal entry.

• Extn

– The phone extension number of the Internal entry.

Page 73

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

External Directory
• External

– The name of an External (outside the medical facility) entry.
(For example: These could be any outside companies, service
providers, equipment service, other medical facilities, outside
emergency numbers, etc.)

• Phone

– The phone number of the External entry.

Master Directory
The Master directory lists all database directory entries.

Special
Destinations

• Name

– The name for the specific entry.

• Phone

– The phone or extension number for the entry.

• Site

– Abbreviation for a facility site or location of the entry.

• Type

– The type of directory entry (Patient, Doctor, Employee, Internal or External.

Some destination names that are displayed from the database appear differently
from the others in the list. These names are of patients to whom calls are generally
not to be transferred. These “special” destinations are described below:
• Extension preceded by an *: A patient who has either not paid for phone service
or wishes to have no phone calls but is in a room that contains a phone. The
expanded version of this record shows whether the patient wants to keep the
number confidential or did not contract for phone service.
• Extension field blank: If a patient has been assigned a DID, the extension
number does not display. If no extension or DID is displayed, the room cannot
receive calls.
• Record is highlighted: If a patient has expired, an ‘X’ will be displayed in the
column to the right of the name column. A Confidential patient will have a ‘C’
displayed in this column.

Expanded Display

The Expanded display is always shown in the right Destination area when a record
entry is selected.

Type of Transfer

Use the left- and right-arrow keys to select between direct or screened transfer. In
a direct transfer, press Enter to transfer the source caller to the extension that is
currently selected. This will release the operator and clear the Operator screen. In
a screened transfer, place the source caller on hold, and connect to the destination.
The operator can stay on the line as long as desired, but must release, cancel, or join
the call manually via the attendant console. Operator release causes the source and
destination parties to be connected.

Operator Transfer

Any time a call is transferred between two operators, the source information shown
on the original operator’s screen is transferred to the recipient operator when the
call is answered. A message that is displayed in the Attendant Status window
shows when the transfer has taken place.

Page 74

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Transfer Failures

Transfers to patients that have been discharged will always fail. Transfers also fail
if the destination station is busy or set to Do Not Disturb. If a transfer fails, the Call
Status window displays an error message, and the search list remains displayed.

Off-Line Mode

If the OAI connection between the attendant console and the PBX is down for any
reason, the Directory Assistance functions perform as usual, except that when you
press Enter to transfer a call, a message displays showing that the system is offline, and the call is not transferred. The system displays the destination number
information, but the call must be placed manually via the actual console. The
destination menu is only cleared by selection of the Clear command. Once the OAI
is reestablished, all functions return to normal.

Key Function
Summary

Below is a list of the typical functions of the support keys:
Enter

–

Begins the designated action (e.g., search or transfer).

Up/down arrows

–

Moves the highlight up and down the list for selection
purposes; also scrolls the list up and down for display
on the screen.

Right/left arrows

–

Select the type of transfer (i.e., direct or screened).

Esc

–

Returns the cursor to the previous position (e.g., from
displayed search results back to name or number
prompt).

Tab

–

Moves cursor to the next field.

F1-F8 screen buttons –

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Call processing command buttons. (These functions
are described in the following sections.)

Page 75

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Make a Call
Originate a call from this attendant position. Follow the steps below to Make a Call.
1. Use the Directory Assistance feature to select a specific destination for the call.
Select a specific directory type and then select the specific entry, from the directory listing, for the call destination.
2. Press the ENTER key (or select the F1-Make Call screen command button) to
make a call to the selected destination. View the status of the call in the Call Status area at the bottom of the screen.

Transfer a Call
Transfer an incoming call to a destination number. Follow the steps below to
Transfer a call.
1. An incoming source call is answered and any specific source information will
be displayed in the screen Call Source area.
2. Use the Directory Assistance feature to select a specific destination for the call.
Select a directory type and then select the specific entry for the call destination.
3. Press the ENTER key (or select the F2-Transfer screen command button) to
transfer the call to the selected destination. View the status of the call in the Call
Status area at the bottom of the screen.

Transfer Type
Any transfer starts according to the type of transfer shown in the Transfer field area
at the bottom of the screen.
• Direct

- The attendant console and screen are automatically released
from the call and cleared of all information concerning the
call.

• Screen

- The call must be manually released, joined or cancelled. If the
call is cancelled or joined, the source information will continue to be displayed until a new source call is received or the
F7-Clear command button is selected.

Select the button in the transfer status area to toggle between these two options as
needed.

Page 76

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Park a Call
Use the Park command to place a source call on an announcement trunk or a
monitored number queue for paging purposes. Follow the steps below to park a
call.
1. An incoming source call is answered and any specific source information will
be displayed in the screen Call Source area.
2. Select the F3-Park screen command button. The Park Caller window (Figure
5-7) will be displayed.
Note:

This Call Park function can be canceled at anytime by pressing the Esc key, or
selecting the Cancel button on the Park Caller window. The source call must still
be processed.

Figure 5-7 Park Caller Window

3. At the Park Caller window, enter the name of the party that will be paged in the
Page Name field. This page name becomes the call identifier in the database.
Press Enter to continue.
4. A name may already be displayed in the Parked Name field. If the source caller
is listed in the database, their name will be displayed here. Press Enter to accept
the displayed name or change the name as needed and then press Enter.
If no name is displayed, a name can be entered or this field can be left blank.
Add a name and press Enter, or press Enter to continue with no name.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 77

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

5. The Park Method option shows two methods of parking a call. The Operator
Assist method (default) requires the Paged party to call the attendant. The attendant must find and connect the paged and parked parties manually.
The Meet_Me Page method uses a system station number (Orbit) that the Paged
party must dial to be connected directly with the party being parked. This method removes the attendant from the park connection process.
Press Enter to select the default method (Operator Assist), or select Meet_Me
Page and press Enter.

6. Select the OK button to park the call. The call is parked and information on the
call is placed in the database.
If Operator Assist method was used, the attendant can now page the party instructing them to call the operator, etc.
If the Meet_Me Page method was used, the station (Orbit) number assigned for
this parked call is displayed in the Attendant Status area. The attendant can now
page the party instructing them to call this station (Orbit) number.
Note:

Park Recall

This Orbit number is displayed on the Parked Call Retrieval screen (Figure 510). Refer to the later section on Parked Call Retrieval.

If the Park Recall feature is configured, the attendant who originally parked a call
is notified when a parked call times out. MCS automatically transfers the parked
call from the monitored number or announcement trunk back to the original
attendant, and beeps the attendant once. A message is displayed in the Call Status
window indicating the time-out (Figure 5-8).

Figure 5-8 Parked Caller Time-out Status

Page 78

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

When the call is answered, the Attendant Status window displays a message
showing that it is a recall (Figure 5-9).

Figure 5-9 Answer a Park Recall Status

If another parked call for the same attendant times out during this process, another
beep is sounded and the number in the brackets of the message increases by one.
The calls are returned to the attendant and are answered in a first-come, first-serve
order. The message remains displayed until all timed-out parked calls are answered
or been abandoned. Any other messages displayed in the Call Status window will
temporarily replace the time-out message. However, the time-out message returns
(blinking) when any other messages clear. If the original attendant is no longer online, the next on-line attendant is notified of the timed-out parked call(s).

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 79

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Retrieve Parked Call
1. To retrieve a previously parked call, select the F-4 Join screen command button. The Call Destination area will now show a window of all calls currently
parked in the system (Figure 5-10).
Note:

This Call Park Retrieve function can be canceled at anytime by pressing the Esc
key, or selecting the F7-Clear screen command button. The source call must still
be processed.

Note:

If the operator exits the Call Park Retrieval window using the Esc key, the paged
caller is not released. The release must be done from the attendant console.

Figure 5-10 Parked Call Retrieval Window

This window displays all Parked Caller information including the Paged name,
the name of the Parked caller and the current Status of the parked call. The
Orbit number is the Meet-Me Page station number assigned for the parked call.
The Release Time shows the time that the source caller abandoned the call, the
Duration indicates how long the call has been parked, and the Parked By field
shows which attendant originally parked the call.

Page 80

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

2. From the window, select the specific parked call to retrieve (or enter a name in
the Paged Name query field at the bottom of the Parked Call window to select
the call) and press Enter. The parked call will be transferred to the attendant.
The parked call status will now show talking to the attendant. The attendant can
now process the call as needed.

Retrieve from Idle
Screen

The procedure for retrieving a parked call from an idle screen (no incoming call) is
the same as from a screen displaying source caller information on an incoming call.
However, after the operator presses Enter, the caller is routed to either the
attendant requesting the parked caller retrieve or to the priority key, depending
upon how MCS was configured during installation. The attendant then answers the
call.

Park Call Abandon

If a call is abandoned while it is parked, it still appears in the list of parked calls for
a preset amount of time. The display window of parked calls will show a time
notation in the Release Time field that shows when the party abandoned the call,
and the Status field will display Abandoned. MCS automatically removes the call
listing from the display after a preset time-out. As long as the window is displayed,
the deleted call remains on the list. The abandoned call will be cleared when the
display is cleared back to the directory.
With the Meet_Me Page park method, the paged party will be connected with the
operator if the parked party abandons before being connected with the paged party.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 81

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Call a Beeper
Use the Beeper command to place a call to a specified beeper (pager) number. This
function allows alpha-numeric message input for a pager. Follow the steps below
to call a beeper.
1. Use the Directory Assistance feature to select a specific destination entry to
beep. Select the directory type and then select the specific entry for the person
to beep.
2. With a destination selected, select the F6-Beeper screen command button.
If the selected destination has a Beeper #, a Make Call operation will place a
call to the Beeper # (phone #) if the attendant console is idle. If the attendant has
received a caller, a Transfer operation will be initiated to transfer the caller to
the Beeper #. (If the attendant console is off-line, the call must be dialed manually. This manual dial status will be displayed in the Call Status area at the bottom of the screen.)
If the selected destination does not have a Beeper #, but only has a Beeper ID,
the Pager Message window (Figure 5-11) will be displayed.
Note:

This Beeper function can be canceled at anytime by pressing the Esc key, or selecting the Cancel button on the Pager Message window.

Figure 5-11 Beeper Function Window

3. From the Pager Message window, a text message can be entered in the Text Message field. This message will display on a text messaging pager.
4. Select the OK button to make the call to the selected beeper/pager.

Page 82

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Redial
Use the Redial command to place a call to the last caller received by the attendant.
JAVA MCS maintains a record of the last incoming call for this purpose. An
attendant can activate the Redial function anytime the attendant station is idle (not
connected with a caller). Follow the steps below:
1. Select the F6-Redial screen command button. A call will be placed from the attendant to the last call received by this attendant.
If the called extension is busy or the attendant console is connected with another
party when this function is selected, the call operation fails, and an error message will be displayed in the Call Status area.
2. Communicate with the last caller as needed.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 83

JAVA OPERATOR FUNCTIONS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page 84

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 6

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Introduction
Use the Database Administration option on the Main Menu to add, modify,
delete, view, and/or print MCS database records.
Note:

Before extensions can be entered to the database records through this option, the
extensions must be inserted into MCS through the Main Menu System Administration option. (Refer to Chapter 7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, RCS Descriptions for more details.)

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Main Menu ***

Operator Functions
Database Administration

(2)

***

MCS

Database Maintenance

***

System Administration
Configuration Management
Login Name Maintenance
Supervisor Reports
Quit

Patients
Physicians
Employees
Attendant Stations
Other Internal Extensions
Tests/Procedures
External Numbers
Trunk Numbers
Beeper Codes
Emergencies
Quit

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit

Attendant Status

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit
Call Status
Trnfr
MCS Status

D

S

Off-line

Figure 6-1 Database Administration

Types of Database
Records

The MCS Database Maintenance menu reflects the different kinds of records with
which MCS provides the variety of data used by the operator during call
processing. In response to operator activity, MCS pulls records from the database
to display source caller data, results of Directory Assistance searches, and
expanded versions of displayed items. To accommodate this data, the database
contains different types of records. For instance, the data entered and stored for
patients differs from the data entered and stored for physicians or for hospital
services.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 85

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Procedures

The steps by which data is entered, deleted, changed, viewed, and/or printed are the
same regardless of what kind of data is being handled. The fields and expected
entries differ, but the procedures are the same. Note slight differences, such as
patients are admitted (using the Admit command), whereas all other types of
records are added (using the Add command). This chapter provides steps for
handling the data in the database in this section and then describes the different
types of records that the database can contain in Database Procedures on page 88.

Extension
Assignments

Internal hospital extensions must first be assigned through the Extension
Maintenance option before patient, physician, employee, and other assignments
can be made to them. (See Chapter 7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, RCS Descriptions
for more information on assigning internal hospital extensions.) Extension
Maintenance records identify the internal extensions that have been assigned on the
PBX Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) by the type of phone (e.g.,
patient room, nursing station, or attendant console), their location, and, for some,
their default restriction class.
Although MCS assignments to the extensions may change (i.e., patients,
employees, etc.), changes to these basic Extension Maintenance records should be
rare and probably required only by changes that are made at the MAT.

View Command

A View command makes it possible to display a selection, or range, of records. A
beginning pattern and an ending pattern specify the range. The pattern can be either
a partial or full entry of a number or word, according to the type of record selected
from the MCS Database Maintenance menu. When you select the View command,
a pop-up window prompts for the key by which the records are to be retrieved and
displayed.

Menu Access

The Supervisor is always authorized to enter this menu option. An Operator can
enter it only if access is authorized through the Configuration Management
option on the Main Menu.

Page 86

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual

Screen
Samples

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Figure 4-2 shows several of the database records for which the procedures on the
following pages apply:

***

Patients ***

Name:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Age:
Sex:
Address:
City:
State:
Visitors:
Phone Service:
Special:
Comment:

***

Account
Room
Bed
DID

Admit

Discharge

Physicians ***
***

Name:
Beeper Number:
Office Phone Number:
Note:
Specialty:
Associate Name:
Associate Phone Number:
Car Phone Number:
Home Phone Number:

Modify
Add

View

Print

Delete

Tests/Procedures ***
***

Name:
Extension:
Note:
Comment:
Comment:

Emergencies ***

Name:
Extension:
Alternate Extension:
Advice:

Quit

Modify

View
Add

Delete Modify
Add

Delete

Modify

View

Print

Quit

Figure 6-2 Record Field and Command Line Samples

Database Entry
and Exit
Procedure

Action

Result

On the MCS Main Menu, type d to select
the Database Administration option.

The MCS Database Maintenance menu
displays the types of database records.

To select the desired type of database
record, type the highlighted letter.

The fields of the selected record type and a
new command line display. (Figure 6-2)

Note:

In most cases, the highlighted letter is
the first letter of the word. When the
word begins with a letter that has
been used before, the second or even
third letter may be highlighted.

Refer to the following pages for
descriptions of each function provided by
the new command line.
To exit the MCS Database Maintenance
menu, type q (quit).

NDA-30026

Revision 6

The MCS Main Menu displays.

Page 87

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Database Procedures
Add a Record /
Admit a Patient

Use this procedure to add a new record of the type selected or to admit a new
patient to the database.

***

Patients ***

Name:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Age:
Sex:
Address:
City:
State:
Visitors:
Phone Service:
Special:
Comment:

Account
Room
Bed
DID

Admit

Attendant Status

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Discharge

(2)

***

Patients ***

Name:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Age:
Sex:
Address:
City:
State:
Visitors:
Phone Service:
Modify
View
Print
Special:
Comment:
Call Status
Trnfr
Account
Room
Bed
DID

Extension:
Nursing Unit:
Nurse Station:

5062
A1
5000

MCS Status

Enter (Esc) to return to command line
D S

Figure 6-3 Add a Record/Admit a Patient

Effect of Data Entry
Patient admissions occur immediately and are stamped with the current date. If a
patient is admitted with a DID number, this number is turned on as soon as the data
entered to these screens is saved.

Pop-up Windows
On several record types, after identification of the room/bed and/or extension
number, a pop-up window displays data that has previously been assigned to the
extension number through the Extension Maintenance option on the MCS System
Administration menu. This data is for display only; it cannot be changed through
any action in these database screens.

Empty Fields
Not all of the fields in a record require an entry. However, the record is considered
complete only when you press Enter in every field, regardless of whether or not
you have made an entry in that field. Pressing the Esc key before completing a full
record erases any data entered up to that point.

Page 88

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Manual Entry
Patient data is usually obtained when the patient is admitted to the hospital and sent to
the MCS database from the Hospital Data System (HIS). Use this menu option when
patient data must be added manually to the database.

Error Message
If any error occurs while attempting to add the new record to the database, an error
message appears in the Attendant Status window.

Procedure
Action

Type a to select the Add (or Admit, if
adding a patient record) command.

Result

The first field highlights for data entry. (2)

Type data into each field, according to the The message “Do you want to insert this?
field definitions in Database Procedures on (Y/N)” displays.
page 88, and press Enter after each entry.
(In fields that provide choices, use the space
bar to toggle among the options.)
Type Y and press Enter to confirm the
If the addition is confirmed, the word
addition. Type N and press Enter to cancel “Inserted” displays under Attendant Status.
it.
“Record not inserted” displays if the
addition was cancelled. The cursor is
positioned on the command line.
Type q (quit) to exit a particular type of
record.

NDA-30026

Revision 6

The MCS Database Maintenance menu of
record types displays.

Page 89

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Delete a Record/
Discharge a
Patient

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use this procedure to delete a record of the type selected or to discharge a patient
from the database.

***

Name:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Age:
Sex:
Address:
City:
State:
Visitors:
Phone Service:
Special:
Comment:

Attendant Status

Discharge

(1)

Patients ***

Account
Room
Bed
DID

Admit

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Modify

(2)

Name

View

Ext Unit Room Bed Age Sx Adm Dsch

Print

Call Status

Enter Name or Number:

 to search,  to return to command line
Trnfr
MCS Status

D

S

Off-line

Figure 6-4 Delete a Record/Discharge a Patient

Effect of Discharge on DID
When a patient with a DID number is discharged, MCS notifies the PBX to route
that DID number to the configured discharged patient as configured in Chapter 8
CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT. After the discharge time has expired, the
record will be removed from the database.

Error Messages
An error message appears in the Attendant Status window if any error occurs while
attempting to add the new record to the database.

Service Unavailable
If an attempt to change a DID number to the configured destination or to change
the patient’s extension from having phone service to not having phone service is
unsuccessful, the message “Service Unavailable” appears in the Attendant Status
Window. This message shows that the PBX did not receive the change. The
unsuccessful change is recorded in the Outstanding RSC or DID database.

Page 90

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Procedure
Action

Result

Type d to select the Delete (or Discharge if A name or number entry field displays at
deleting a patient record) command. (1)
the bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
heading displays at the top of the screen. (2)
Type part or all of the name or number and All of the matching names or numbers in
press Enter. To display all the matching
the database display.
records, press Enter on the blank entry
field.
Using the arrow keys, move the highlight to The field entries display. The message “Do
the desired name or number and press
you want to delete this? (Y/N)” displays
Enter.
below.
Type Y and press Enter to confirm the
If deletion is confirmed, the word
deletion/discharge. Type N and press Enter “Modified” displays under Attendant
to cancel it.
Status. “Not deleted” or “Not discharged”
displays if the deletion/discharge was
cancelled. The cursor is positioned on the
command line.
Type q (quit) to exit a particular type of
record.

NDA-30026

Revision 6

The MCS Database Maintenance menu of
record types displays.

Page 91

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Modify a Record

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use this procedure to make changes to the field entries of a particular database
record.

Medical Center System

Supervisor

***

Admit

Attendant Status

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Patients ***

(2)
Name:
Room:
Name
Ext Unit Room Bed Age Sx Adm Dsch
Bed Number (0-2):
Account Number:
DID Number:
Age:
*** Patients ***
Sex:
Address:
Atherby, Jim
Name:
City:
29813-003
Account Number:
State:
138
Room Number:
Visitors:
2
Bed Number:
Phone Service:
51210
DID Number:
Comment:
39
Age:
Special:
M
Sex:
724 Harwild Drive
Address:
Enter Name or Number:
Belair
City:
North Dakota
State:

to
search,

to
return
to
command
line
Discharge
Modify
View
Print
Yes
Visitors:
None
Phone Service:
Special:
Call Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
Comment:

(3)

Off-line
D S
Enter (Esc) to return to command line

Figure 6-5 Modify a Record

External Numbers
To modify or search for external numbers, enter them exactly as they appear in the
database, including parentheses and dashes.

Procedure
Action

Result

Type m to select the Modify command. (1) A name or number entry field displays at
the bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
heading displays at the top of the screen. (2)
Type part or all of the name or number of
the record to be changed and press Enter.
To display all names or numbers, press
Enter when the blank entry field is
highlighted.

All the matching names or numbers in the
database display.

Using the arrow keys, move the highlight to The contents of the selected record display.
the desired name or number and press
(3)
Enter.

Page 92

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual

Action

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Result

Use the arrow keys to move among the
The message “Do you want to save
fields, the backspace key to erase existing changes? (Y/N)” displays.
data, and the space bar to toggle among
options within a field. Type new data where
required and press Enter after each entry.
Type Y and press Enter to save the change. If the save is confirmed, the word
Type N and press Enter to cancel it.
“Modified” displays under Attendant
Status. “Record not modified” displays if
the modification was cancelled. The cursor
is positioned on the command line.
Type q (quit) to exit a particular type of
record.

NDA-30026

Revision 6

The MCS Database Maintenance menu of
record types displays.

Page 93

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

View Database
Records

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use this procedure to display selected database records for on-screen viewing or
printing.

***
Name:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Number:
Age:
Sex:
Address:
City:
State:
Visitors:
Phone Service:
Special:
Comment:

Account
Room
Bed
DID

Admit

Discharge

Attendant Status

Modify

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Patients ***
(2)

Key:

Name

Room

Starting Key:
Ending Key:

(3)

Top of File
*** Patients ***
 to begin,  to Return to Command LIne
Destination Name
Ext Unit Rm Bd Age Sx Admt Dschr
Robertson, Shirley
2301 2E
225 1
49
F 08-15
Visitors: Yes
Account Number: 910893783
Address: 123 Street Ct., Irving, TX
Nurse Station: 2100
DID Number: 7171
Phone Service: Local Calls Only
Comment: Does not want flowers in room.
View
Print
Special:
Robertson, Thomas
2285 4S
429 2
35
M 08-17
Yes
Visitors: Trnfr
Call Status
MCS Status
More

D
DownPage

UpPage

Off-line

S

Search

Top

Bottom

Print

Quit

Figure 6-6 View Database Records

Range Values
The first digit of the beginning value must be smaller than the first digit of the
ending search value when specifying the range of records to be viewed. For
instance, if you enter 41 as the beginning value and 299 as the ending value, the
search will fail because 4 is greater than 2.

Page 94

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Procedure
Action

Type v to select the View command. (1)

Result

A window prompts for the key used to
search the database and the beginning and
ending pattern of records to be displayed.
(2)

To show the range of records to be viewed, All records within the range shown are
type the first record value and press Enter, displayed. (3)
and type the last value and press Enter.
Use the DownPage command to move
forward one page, the UpPage command to
move back one page, the Top command to
move to the beginning of the display, and
the Bottom command to move to the end of
the display.
Search the Display: Type s to select the
Search command. At the prompt, type the
desired pattern and press Enter.

All occurrences of the given pattern on that
page highlight.

Print the Display: Type p to select the Print There is a pause while the material is sent to
command. At the prompt, type f to print the the printer. Then, the command line is
whole file or s to print the screen and press returned.
Enter.

NDA-30026

To exit the display, type q (quit).

The data entry screen of the current record
type displays again, and the cursor is
positioned on the command line.

Type q (quit) to exit a particular type of
record.

The MCS Database Maintenance menu
displays.

Revision 6

Page 95

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Print Database
Records

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use this procedure to print all or part of the records of a selected type.

***
Name:
Account Number:
Room Number:
Bed Number:
DID Number:
Age:
Sex:
Address:
City:
State:
Visitors:
Phone Service:
Special:
Comment:

Admit

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Discharge

Modify

Attendant Status

Patients ***

Key:

Name

Room

Starting Key:
Ending Key:

 to begin,  to Return to Command LIne

View

Print

Quit

Call Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 6-7 Print Database Records

Range Values
The first digit of the beginning value must be smaller than the first digit of the
ending value when specifying the range of records to be printed. For instance, if
you enter 41 as the beginning value and 299 as the ending value, the search will fail
because 4 is greater than 2.

Procedure
Action

Type p to select the Print command. (1)

Result

A window displays prompts for the search
key and the starting and ending values, or
keys, for the search range.

Using the space bar, toggle between the
All records within the range shown are sent
displayed keys. Press Enter to select the
to the printer and the cursor is positioned on
desired key. To show the range of records to the command line.
be printed, type the first record value and
press Enter, and type the last value and
press Enter.
Type q (quit) to exit a particular type of
record.

Page 96

The MCS Database Maintenance menu of
record types displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Database Record Descriptions
The kinds of records that can be accessed through the MCS Database Maintenance
menu are listed below. Also listed are field definitions and the additional data displayed
in a pop-up window from related assignments through the Extension Maintenance
option.

Patients

Normally, patient data comes from the Hospital Information System (HIS) and is added
to the system when the patient is admitted. However, patient information can be added
manually to the database using this record type, if required. Select the Patient option
to display the following fields for data entry:
Name

A 30-character, unique patient name, generally in the
form last, first initial.

Room

The four-digit number of the room to which the patient
has been assigned. The first character must be numeric if
Directory Assistance searches by room number are to be
made available through Operator Functions.

Bed

The one-digit number of the bed in the room to which the
patient has been assigned. Valid values: A-Z, 0-9.

Note:

NDA-30026

After data is entered in these first three fields, a pop-up window displays the following
data that has been assigned through the Extension Maintenance option:
Extension - The phone extension associated with the assigned room and bed.
Unit - The medical unit in which the assigned room is located.
Nurse Station - The extension of the nursing station that is responsible for the room.

Account No.

The patient’s account number, consisting of up to ten
characters. This number must be unique.

DID Number

The five-digit Direct Inward Dialing number used for
calling the patient directly from outside the hospital
without going through the operator.

Age

The three-digit age of the patient. If the patient is months
or days old, the third character is either an m or a d
respectively (e.g., 100, 30, 12m, 1d). An entry is required
in this field.

Sex

The gender of the patient. Use the space bar to toggle
between M(ale) and F(emale). The default is M.

Address

The street address of the patient, up to 30 alphanumeric
characters.

City

The city in which the patient lives, up to 15 alphanumeric
characters.

State

The two-character abbreviation of the state in which the
patient lives.

Revision 6

Page 97

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Visitors

An entry that indicates whether the patient is
accepting visitors. Use the space bar to toggle
between the two options: yes and no. The default is
Yes.

Phone Service

A choice between the entries made to the Restriction
for Patients with no Srv and the Restriction for
Patient Phone Service fields in the Configuration
Management option on the MCS Main Menu. Use the
space bar to toggle between the two options.

Comment

An open field consisting of up to 40 characters for any
required patient information.

Special

One of the following reasons why calls to this patient
should not be attempted. (Use arrow keys or the space
bar to move among options, and press Enter to accept
the selection.)
Not Applicable– Does not apply to this patient; calls
are permitted.
Confidential

– The patient does not want others to
know he/she is there.

No Phone Service–The patient has not contracted for
phone service.
Deceased

Physicians

Page 98

– The patient is deceased.

Select the Physician option to display the following fields for data entry:
Name

A 30-character physician’s name.

Pager Dial Number

The number for the long-distance pocket pager carried by
the physician listed in the Name field. This number is
dialed when the operator selects this entry from the
Beeper function. The outgoing trunk access code
must be included. This number contain up to 15 digits.

Pager ID

The logical or local pager ID number for the pager device
assigned to the individual or group. Use the word
None if a local pager ID number is not available.

Office Phone

The office telephone number for the physician listed in the
Name field, up to 15 digits.

Note

A 15-character area for data displayed under Operator
Functions for this physician when the Directory
Assistance feature is used (e.g., the hours at which the
physician can be reached at the office phone number).

Specialty

The primary area of medicine in which this physician
practices, up to 10 characters.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual

Employees

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Associate Name

The name of the back-up physician to be called if the named
physician cannot be reached, up to 30 characters.

Associate Phone

The telephone number (external or internal) at which the
back-up physician can be reached, up to 15 digits.

Car Phone

The named physician’s car phone number, up to 15
digits.

Home Phone

The named physician’s home phone number, up to 15
digits.

This kind of record contains the following fields for all employees that are not already
included in the Physician database:
Name

A 30-character employee name.

Extension

The phone number assigned to the employee, up to five
digits.

Pager Dial Number

The on-site or long-distance pager number for dialing the
pager carried by the employee, up to 15 digits.

Note:

This number is not called through the "Beeper" function only.

Pager ID

Note:

The logical or local pager ID number for the pager device
assigned to the individual or group. Use the word None
if a local pager ID number is not available.
After data is entered in these first two fields, a pop-up window displays data assigned
to this extension through the Extension Maintenance option:
Department – Department to which this extension is assigned. Displayed under Operator Functions on the primary line of a directory lookup.
Room – Room in which this extension is located. Under Operator Functions, it displays when the record is expanded or when the record is shown in the Source Caller
window.
Restriction – Level of restriction associated with this extension, set up under the RSC
Description option on the MCS System Administration Menu. Under Operator Functions it displays when the record is expanded.

NDA-30026

Note

A 15-character area for data that displays under Operator
Functions for this employee when the Directory
Assistance feature is used (e.g., the employee’s work
schedule).

Home Phone Number

The employee’s home telephone number as displayed
under Operator Functions only if the record is expanded,
up to 15 digits.

Revision 6

Page 99

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Comment

Attendant Stations

Selecting this option allows the supervisor to set up an attendant terminal or station
and displays the following fields for that purpose:
Attendant ID

The number that represents this attendant console.
MCS converts this number to the attendant notation
defined under the Configuration Management option
(i.e., Att#), displays it in the Directory Assistance
database, and uses it in attendant transfers.

Extension

The extension number defined for this attendant
console. This extension must not have been assigned
to another attendant but must have been previously
defined through the NEAX Maintenance
Administration Terminal.

Note:

After entry of the extension, a pop-up window displays the Department and Room
information that has been associated with the extension through the Extension
Maintenance option. (Extensions that correspond to attendant stations do not
have restrictions.)

Device

Other Internal
Extensions

The name of this attendant’s CRT device. This
number corresponds directly to the communication
port (tty) on the computer to which this attendant
CRT is connected. Each device can be assigned to
only one attendant.

This kind of record contains extensions and data for general locations within the
hospital such as cafeterias, gift shops, break rooms, and waiting rooms. Extensions
assigned to these locations may also be found in other records, but their primary
location is defined here. When a call comes from one of these locations, the
following fields are displayed in the Source Caller window:
Name

The name of an internal location or entity, up to 30
characters. Examples: gift shop, cafeteria, medical
conference room, or pharmacy.

Extension

The five-digit extension number assigned to this
location or entity.

Note:

Note

Page 100

An area of 40 characters made available for any data
required for this employee. This displays under
Operator Functions only if the record is expanded.

After entry of the name and extension, a pop-up window displays the Department,
Room, and default Restriction information that has been associated to the extension through the Extension Maintenance option. (The Restriction can only be
viewed when the record is expanded.)

A 15-character area for data displayed for this
location or entity when the Directory Assistance
feature is used under Operator Functions.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Comments (2)

Tests /
Procedures

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Two areas of 40 characters each made available for data
required for this location or entity. This displays under
Operator Functions only if the record is expanded or
when a call is originated from this extension.

This option is used to identify the names of tests and medical procedures scheduled by
callers and the extension by which each test or procedure can be scheduled. Records
entered through this option never appear in the Source Caller window but are most
likely already entered in the Other Internal Extensions database. Selection of this
option displays the following fields:
Name

The name of the test or procedure, up to 30 characters.

Extension

The extension through which a caller can schedule the
test or procedure or obtain information about it.

Note:

External
Numbers

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

After you enter the test/procedure name and extension number, a pop-up window displays the department, room, and default restriction data tied to the extension through
the Extension Maintenance option.

Note

A 15-character area for data displayed for this test or
procedure when the Directory Assistance feature is used
under Operator Functions.

Comments(2)

Two areas of 40 characters each made available for
information required for this test or procedure. This
information displays when the record is expanded in
Directory Assistance under Operator Functions.

This option is used to identify telephone numbers that are outside of the hospital PBX
system. Select this option to display the following fields for data entry:
Name

The unique name associated with this location or entity,
up to 15 characters. Examples: City Police, Medical
Examiner, or Independent Laboratory.

Number

The telephone number for this location, consisting of up
to 15 characters and entered with parentheses and dashes
as needed to separate the number components. The
number must be preceded with the outgoing trunk access
code. Example: (214) 555-1212.

Note

A 15-character area for data displayed for this selection
when the Directory Assistance feature is used under
Operator Functions.

Comments (2)

Two areas of 40 characters each for data required for this
location or number that displays when the record is
expanded in Directory Assistance under Operator
Functions.

Page 101

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Trunk Numbers

Beeper Codes

Emergencies

This option is used to assign in MCS the numbers by which incoming trunks are
identified in the PBX configuration (and retrieved from the database). However, even
an unassigned trunk number can be displayed in the Source Caller window, since it is
provided by the PBX. Select the Trunk Numbers option to display the following fields
for data entry:
Trunk Number

The number configured for this incoming trunk at the
PBX MAT.

Trunk Name

The unique name by which an incoming trunk is known,
up to 15 characters. Examples: Metro or 800

Note

A 15-character area for data displayed for this location or
entity when the Directory Assistance feature is used
under Operator Functions.

Comments (2)

Two areas of 40 characters each for whatever data may
be required for this incoming trunk.

After an operator pages a physician or employee by beeper dial number, the operator
manually enters a code number that gives the reason for the page. The Beeper Codes
option is used to tie reasons for paging by beeper with these manually entered code
numbers. Select this option to display the following fields for data entry:
Code Name

The reason why the operator is paging the beeper holder,
up to 30 characters.

Code Number

The number to be entered manually by the operator to
give the purpose of the page.

The emergency records give the operator primary and alternate extensions for
incoming emergency calls. This option is also used to identify primary and alternate
extensions by which a supervisor can be alerted to monitor an on-going operator
conversation. Select this option to display the following fields for data entry:
Problem

A description of an emergency situation or a supervisor
notation, up to 30 characters. To make the supervisor
conversation monitoring feature available to operators, at
least one of these records must be completed with the
word Supervisor entered in this field.

Extension

The primary extension number to be contacted for a
certain emergency or to alert the given supervisor for
conversation monitoring, up to five digits.

Note:

Page 102

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

After entry of the extension and then again after entry of the alternate extension, a
pop-up window displays the department, room, and default restriction data that has
been tied to that extension through the Extension Maintenance option.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

NDA-30026 Revision 6

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Alternate Extension

The alternate extension to be contacted if the primary
extension number is busy, up to five digits. No alternate
extension is accepted on a Supervisor record.

Note

Any data that might be helpful for the operator to have
while connected to the emergency caller, up to 25
characters.

Page 103

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page 104

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 7

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Introduction
Use the System Administration option on the Main Menu to alter and view
system-specific data such as hospital extensions, valid patient direct-inward-dial
(DID) numbers, restriction classes, and any outstanding restriction or DID
changes.

***

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Main Menu ***
(2)

***

Operator Functions

MCS

System Administration

***

Database Administration
System Administration

RSC Descriptions

Configuration Management

Extension Maintenance
Patient DID Numbers
Outstanding RSC Requests
Outstanding DID Requests
Quit

Login Name Maintenance
Supervisor Reports
Quit

Arrow
to move
Arrow keys to move cursor, 
to keys
select,
cursor,
to quit to select,  to quit

Attendant Status

Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-1 System Administration

Menu Options

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The System Administration menu provides access to the following options:
RSC Descriptions

Attribute the same meanings to MCS restriction
classes as those assigned at the PBX Maintenance
Administration Terminal.

Extension Maintenance

Add, alter, print, or view extension data to match
the PBX MAT data.

Patient DID Numbers

Add, delete, view, or print DID numbers for MCS
use with patients.

Outstanding RSC Requests

Manage RSC requests that could not be acted on
before and were placed in this file as a result.

Outstanding DID Requests

Manage DID requests that could not be acted on
before and were placed in this file as a result.

Page 105

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Procedure

Action

On the MCS Main Menu, type s to select
the System Administration option.

Result

The MCS System Administration menu
displays.

To select the desired menu option, type the
highlighted letter.
Note:

In most cases, the highlighted letter is
the first letter of the word. When the
word begins with a letter that has
been used before, the second or even
third letter may be highlighted.

Refer to the following pages for
descriptions of each menu option.
To exit the System Administration option,
type q (quit).

Page 106

The MCS Main Menu displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

RSC Descriptions
Use the RSC Descriptions option on the MCS System Administration menu to assign
the same meaning to the MCS restriction classes as those assigned at the PBX.

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

MCS

System Administration

***

RSC Descriptions
(2)

Extension Maintenance
Patient DID Numbers
Outstanding RSC Requests
Outstanding DID Requests
RSC
Quit
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC

***
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:

Restriction Class Descriptions
Disabled-0
Local-1-Pitt
Local-2-WATS

RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC

Local-4-NY
Local-5-TIE
Local-6-DDD

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit
Modify
Print
Attendant Status

Call

Status

S

Local-8-PIT
Unrestricted
Discharged
Internal only
PhoneService
Local
Local-14-TIE
Local-Down

Quit

Trnfr
D

8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

***

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-2 Restriction Class Descriptions

PBX Restriction
Classes

The NEAX PBX contains 16 restriction classes that are numbered from 0 to 15. They
are defined by the PBX administrator via the Maintenance Administration Terminal
(MAT). These class definitions can be whatever is required by the site(s) served by the
PBX. For instance, RSC 4 might mean unrestricted calling privileges at one site but
mean disable a telephone at another site. MCS must know what the valid PBX
restrictions are to prevent changing an extension’s restrictions to a value that is not
understood by the PBX. Use this option to assign to MCS the restriction classes
assigned at the PBX MAT.

Other Affected
Options

The RSC descriptions assigned through this option are used elsewhere in MCS. The
Extension Maintenance option displays them as choices during restriction
assignment. The Configuration Management option displays them as choices during
the assignment of restrictions for patients who have phone service.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 107

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS System Administration menu, The Restriction Class Descriptions screen
type r to select the RSC Descriptions
displays. (2)
option. (1)
To Modify RSC Descriptions:
Type m to select the Modify command.

The description of the first restriction class
highlights for changes.

Press Enter to move to the RSC description The message “Do you want to save
that is to be changed, and use the backspace changes? (Y/N)” displays.
key to erase any existing description. Type
the new description and press Enter.
Repeat this procedure until all required
RSC descriptions are changed.
Type Y and press Enter to save any
If the changes are confirmed, the word
changes. Type N and press Enter to cancel “Modified” displays in the Attendant Status
them.
Window to show that the change has been
inserted into the database.
“Record not modified” displays if the
change was cancelled. The cursor is
positioned on the command line.
To Print RSC Descriptions:
Type p to select the Print command.

Type q (quit) to exit the Restriction Class
Descriptions display.

Page 108

The screen is sent to the printer and the
word “Done” displays in the Attendant
Status Window.
The MCS System Administration menu
displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Extension Maintenance
Use the Extension Maintenance option on the MCS Database Maintenance menu to
add, modify, delete, view, and/or print extension assignment records. All MCSsupported extensions must first be assigned through this option.

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

MCS

System Administration

RSC Descriptions
Extension Maintenance
Patient DID Numbers
Outstanding RSC Requests
Outstanding DID Requests
Quit

***

(2)

***

Extension Maintenance

***

Patient Room Extensions
Attendant Console Extensions
Nurse Station Extensions
Other Extensions
Quit

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit

Attendant Status

Call

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit
Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
D

S

Off-line

Figure 7-3 Extension Maintenance

Internal
Extension
Assignments

Assign all internal hospital extensions through this option before making other
assignments (e.g., patient, physician, employee) to them. These Extension
Maintenance records identify the internal extensions that have been assigned on the
PBX Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) by the type of phone (e.g., patient
room, nursing station), their tenant, their location, and, for some, their default
restriction class. Although MCS assignments to the extensions may change (i.e.,
patients, employees), changes to these basic Extension Maintenance records should be
rare and probably required only by changes at the MAT.

Pop-up Window
Information

When an extension number is entered in some options on the MCS Database
Maintenance menu, a pop-up window displays basic location and restriction data
known about that extension through the Extension Maintenance option. (Exception:
The restriction data displayed in the pop-up window is assigned through the RSC
Descriptions option on the MCS System Administration menu. Refer to “Introduction”
on page 105 for more information.)

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 109

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Empty Fields

Not all of the fields in a record require an entry. However, the record is considered
complete only when you press Enter after each field highlights, regardless of whether
you have made an entry in that field. Pressing the Esc key before completing a full
record erases any data entered up to that point.

Range Values

The first digit of the beginning value must be smaller than the first digit of the ending
value when specifying the range of records to be printed. For instance, if you enter 41
as the beginning value and 299 as the ending value, the search will fail because 4 is
greater than 2.

Common
Procedure

Although the information required in the database differs from one kind of extension
to another (e.g., from patient room to attendant console extensions), the procedures by
which information is entered, deleted, changed, viewed, and/or printed are the same.
This section provides one set of procedures for handling Extension Maintenance
information in the database. The different types of records that the database can contain
are described by their fields under the procedure “Add an Extension” on page 112.

View Command

The View command allows you to display a selection, or range, of extension records.
The range is specified by a beginning pattern and an ending pattern. The pattern can be
either a partial or full entry of a number or word which differs according to the type of
record selected from the MCS Extension Maintenance menu. When you select the
View command, a pop-up window prompts for the keys by which the records are to be
retrieved and displayed.

Menu Access

The Supervisor is always authorized to enter this menu option. An Operator can enter
it only if such access is authorized through the Configuration Management option on
the Main Menu.

***

Patient Room Extensions

Extension:
Room Number:
Bed Number:
Nursing Unit:
Default Restriction:
Tenant Number:

Add

Delete

Modify

***

***

Attendant Console Extensions ***

Extension:
Department:
Room Number:
Tenant Number:

View
Add

Print
Delete

***

Nurse Station Extensions ***

Extension:
Department:
Room Number:
Default Restriction:
Nursing Unit:
Tenant Number:

***

Other Extensions

***

Extension:
Department:
Room Number:
Default Restriction:
Tenant Number:

Quit
Modify

View
Add

Delete Modify
Add

Delete

Modify

View

Print

Quit

Figure 7-4 Record Field and Command Line Samples

Page 110

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS System Administration menu, The Extension Maintenance menu displays
type e to select the Extension Maintenance the types of extensions.
option.
Refer to the following pages for
descriptions of each type of extension
record.
To exit the Extension Maintenance menu,
type q (quit).

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The MCS System Administration menu
displays.

Page 111

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Add an Extension
Use this procedure to add a new extension record of the type selected to the database.

***

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Other Extensions

***

Extension:
Department:
Room Number:
Default Restriction:
Tenant Number:

(2)

***

Other Extensions

***

Extension:
Department:
Room Number:
Default Restriction:
Tenant Number:

Add

Delete

Modify

Attendant Status

View

Print

Call

Quit

Enter (Esc) to Return to Command Line
Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
D

S

Figure 7-5 Add an Extension

Assignment
Sequence

An extension cannot be assigned to a unit until the unit has been assigned through the
Nurse Station Extension option on the Extension Maintenance menu.

Extension
Record
Descriptions

Each of the extension record types is described below:

Page 112

• Patient Room Extension: This type of extension is assigned to a bed in a room on a
specific unit that is under the responsibility of one nurses’ station. This information
does not change frequently, but it must be kept current and accurately reflect
extension assignments made at the PBX MAT. Patient Room Extension assignments
require the following field information:
Extension

The extension number itself, up to 5 digits. This number
must be unique.

Room Number

The number of the room to which the extension is
assigned, up to 4 characters (letters or numbers).

Bed Number

The number of the bed to which the extension is
assigned. This number can be only one digit. Bed 0
indicates a private room.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Unit

Note:

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

The ward or location of the room containing the
extension, up to 4 characters.
This Unit must have been previously associated to a nursing station under the Nurse
Station Extensions option.

Default Restriction

The restriction class that is restored to the extension
when a patient is discharged from the room. You can
scroll through the possible entries for this field by
pressing the space bar. These entries correspond to those
set up in the Configuration Management option on the
Main Menu.

Tenant Number

The tenant number assigned for this extension at the
PBX.

• Attendant Console Extensions: These extensions may belong to specific
departments, or they may be located in one or more rooms. Selection of this option
displays the following fields for data entry:
Extension

The number being assigned to the attendant console. This
number must be unique and can contain up to 5
characters.

Department

The name or number of the department in which the
attendant console is located, up to 4 characters. This field
may be left blank if not applicable.

Room Number

The number of the room to which the extension is
assigned, up to 4 characters (letters or numbers).

Tenant Number

The tenant number assigned for this extension at the
PBX.

• Nurse Station Extensions: It is assumed that each unit has only one nursing station
assigned to it, and that, when a patient is admitted and assigned to a room on a unit,
the nursing station extension corresponding to that unit is applicable. Selection of
this option displays the following fields for data entry:

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Extension

The number being assigned to the nursing station, up to 5
digits. This number must be unique.

Department

The name or number of the department in which the
nursing station is located, up to 4 characters. This field
may be left blank if not applicable.

Room Number

The number of the room to which the extension is
assigned. This field must begin with a number and can
contain up to 4 characters.

Default Restriction

The restriction class of the extension. You can scroll
through the possible entries for this field by pressing the
space bar. These entries correspond to those set up in the
Configuration Management option on the Main Menu.

Page 113

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Unit

The ward or area for which this nursing station is
responsible, up to 4 characters.

Tenant Number

The tenant number assigned for this extension at the
PBX.

• Other Extensions: This option is used to make assignments for all extensions that
are to be supported by MCS, except patient room, attendant console, and nursing
station extensions. Such extensions might be later assigned to specific tests and
procedures or to other locations such as conference rooms, gift shops, or cafeterias.
Selection of this option displays the following fields for data entry:
Extension

The phone number being assigned, up to 5 digits. This
number must be unique.

Department

The name or number of the department in which the
extension is located, up to 4 characters. This field may be
left blank if not applicable.

Room Number

The number of the room to which the extension is
assigned, up to 4 characters (letters or numbers).

Default Restriction

The restriction class of the extension. You can scroll
through the possible entries for this field by pressing the
space bar. These entries correspond to those set up in the
Configuration Management option on the Main Menu.

Tenant Number

The tenant number assigned for this extension at the
PBX.

Procedure
Action

Type a to select the Add command. (1)

Result

The first field highlights for data entry. (2)

Type data to each field according to the
The message “Do you want to insert this?
field definition, and press Enter after each (Y/N)” displays.
entry.
Note 1: The entry in the first field must be
unique, but the remaining fields are
open entry.
Note 2: In fields that provide choices, use the
space bar to toggle among the options.

Page 114

Type Y and press Enter to confirm the
addition; type N and press Enter to cancel
it.

If confirmed, the word “Inserted” displays
in the Attendant Status Window. “Record
not inserted” displays if the addition was
cancelled. The cursor is positioned on the
command line.

To exit the record type, type q (quit).

The Extension Maintenance menu displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Delete an Extension
Use this procedure to delete an extension record of the type selected from the database.

***

Other Extensions

Extension:
Department:
Room Number: Ext
Default Restriction:

Add

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Delete

Modify

(1)

***

(2)

Dept

View

Unit

Room

Bed

D_RSC

Tenant

Enter Extension:
Print
Quit


search,  to return to command line
Call toStatus
Trnfr
MCS Status

Attendant Status

D

S

Figure 7-6 Delete an Extension

Procedure
Action

Type d to select the Delete command. (1)

Result

An extension entry field displays at the
bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
extension heading displays at the top of the
screen. (2)

Type all or part of the extension number to All of the matching extensions in the
be deleted and press Enter. To display all database display.
extension numbers, press Enter on the
blank extension entry field.
Using the arrow keys, move the highlight to The field entries display and the message
the extension to be deleted and press Enter. “Do you want to delete this? (Y/N)”
displays at the bottom of the screen.
Type Y and press Enter to confirm the
deletion; type N and press Enter to cancel
it.

If confirmed, the word “Deleted” displays
in the Attendant Status Window. “Record
not deleted” displays if the deletion was
cancelled. The cursor is positioned on the
command line.

To exit the record type, type q (quit).

The Extension Maintenance menu displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 115

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Modify an Extension
Use this procedure to make changes to the field entries of a particular extension record.

***

Other Extensions

Ext

Dept

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***
Unit

Room

Bed

D_RSC

(2)

Tenant

Extension:
Department:
Room Number:
Default Restriction:

(3)

***

Enter Extension:

Other Extensions

Extension:
Room Number:
Bed Number (0-2):
Unit:
Default Restriction:
Tenant Number:

***

1011
101
2
A1
Local-1
1

 to search,  to return to command line
Add

Delete

Modify

View

Attendant Status

Call

Print
Status

Quit

Trnfr

MCS Status

D
S
Enter (Esc) to Return to Command Line

Figure 7-7 Modify an Extension

Procedure
Action

Result

Type m to select the Modify command. (1) An extension entry field displays at the
bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
heading displays at the top of the screen. (2)
Type all or part of the extension and press All the matching extensions in the database
Enter. To display all extensions, press
display.
Enter when the cursor is on the blank entry
field.
Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to The contents of the selected record display.
the desired name or number and press
(3)
Enter.
Use the arrow keys to move among the
The message “Do you want to save
fields, the backspace key to erase existing changes? (Y/N)” displays.
data, and the space bar to toggle among
options within a field. Type new data where
required and press Enter after each entry.

Page 116

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Action

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Result

Type Y and press Enter to save the
The word “Modified” displays in the
changes. Type N and press Enter to cancel Attendant Status Window. “Record not
them.
modified” displays if the change was
cancelled. The cursor is positioned on the
command line.
To exit the record type, type q (quit).

The Extension Maintenance menu displays.

Type Y and press Enter to save the
The word “Modified” displays in the
changes. Type N and press Enter to cancel Attendant Status Window. “Record not
them.
modified” displays if the change was
cancelled. The cursor is positioned on the
command line.
To exit the record type, type q (quit).

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The Extension Maintenance menu displays.

Page 117

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

View Extension Records
Use this procedure to display selected database records for on-screen viewing or
printing.

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Other Extensions

Extension:
Department:
Room Number:
Default Restriction:

(1)

***
(2)

Key:

Extension

Room

Starting Key:
Ending Key:
(3)

Top of 
File
to begin,
 to
Return
to Command
*** Patient
Room
Extensions
*** Line

Add

Delete

Ext
1011
1012
1021
Modify
1022

Dept

View

Print

Unit
A1
A1
A1
A1 Quit

Room
101
101
102
102

Bed
1
2
1
2

D_RSC
Local-1
Local-1
Local-1
Local-1

Tenant
1
1
1
1

More
Attendant Status

Call Status
DownPage
UpPage
Search

Trnfr
MCS Status
Top
Bottom
Print
D
S

Quit

Figure 7-8 View Extension Records

Procedure

Action

Type v to select the View command. (1)

Result

A window requests the search key and the
starting and ending values for the search
range. (2)

Using the space bar, toggle between the
All records within the given range display
displayed search keys and press Enter to
for on-screen viewing. (3)
select the desired key. Type the first record
value and press Enter, and then the last and
press Enter.

Page 118

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Action

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Result

Use the DownPage command to move
forward one page, the UpPage command to
move back one page, the Top command to
move to the beginning of the display, and
the Bottom command to move to the end of
the display.
Search the Display: Type s to select the
Search command. At the prompt, type the
desired pattern and press Enter.

All of the occurrences of the pattern on that
page are highlighted.

Print the Display: Type p to select the Print There is a pause while the material is sent to
command. At the prompt, type f to print the the printer. Then the command line returns.
whole file or s to print the screen and press
Enter.
To exit the display, type q (quit).

The data entry screen of the current record
type redisplays, and the cursor is positioned
on the command line.

Type q (quit) to exit a particular type of
record.

The Extension Maintenance menu displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 119

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Print Extension Records
Use this procedure to print all or part of the records of a selected type.

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Patient Room Extensions

Extension:
Room Number:
Bed Number (0-2):
Unit:
Default Restriction:
Tenant:

***

Key:

Extension

Room

Starting Key:
Ending Key:

 to begin,  to Return to Command Line

Add

Delete

Modify

Attendant Status

View
Call

Print
Status

Quit

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-9 Print Extension Records

Procedure

Action

Type p to select the Print command.

Result

A window displays with prompts for the
search key and the starting and ending
values, or keys, for the search range.

Using the space bar, toggle between the
All records lying within the indicated range
displayed keys and press Enter to select the are sent to the printer and the cursor is
desired key. To show the range of records to positioned on the command line.
be printed, type the first record value and
press Enter, and type the last and press
Enter.
Type q (quit) to exit a particular type of
record.

Page 120

The Extension Maintenance menu displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Patient DID Numbers
Use the Patient DID Numbers option on the MCS System Administration menu to
assign Direct-Inward-Dial (DID) numbers to patients so that callers can ring a patient’s
phone directly, without operator intervention.

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

MCS

System Administration

***

RSC Descriptions
Extension Maintenance
Patient DID Numbers
Outstanding RSC Requests
Outstanding DID Requests
Quit

(2)

***

Patient DID Numbers

***

DID Number:
State:
Stamped:

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit

Attendant Status

Call

Add
Status

Delete

View

Trnfr
D

S

Print

Quit

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-10 Patient DID Numbers

Transfers

As patients are moved to different locations within the hospital, their individuallyassigned DID number follows them, making it possible for relatives, friends, and other
callers to contact them without having to track their movements.

DID Number
Status

Once entered to MCS through the Add command, DID numbers can be in any one of
the following states:

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Available

The DID number has been entered successfully to MCS and is
available for assignment to an incoming patient.

Offered

The DID number is entered to the record of an incoming
patient. When in this state, a DID number should not be
assigned to another patient. The length of time that a number
can remain in this status is designated through a configuration
parameter.

Page 121

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

“Stamped”
Notation

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Pending

The offered DID number has not been activated by the PBX.
Once the patient record with the offered DID number
assignment arrives from the HIS or is saved on the MCS
menus, MCS attempts to send a message to the PBX to
activate the DID number. If for any reason this message fails,
the request is placed in the database of outstanding DID
requests, and the DID number is considered to be in a Pending
state. The number remains in this state until the message to the
PBX successfully activates it or it is deleted from the DID
database.

Active

The offered DID number has been activated at the PBX and is
in effect for a patient. The DID number remains active until
the patient is discharged, at which time it is again considered
available.

Under the View command, each DID number with a status other than Available has an
entry under the Stamped heading. This notation indicates the date and time at which the
DID number last changed from one status to another.

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS System Administration menu, The Patient DID Numbers screen displays
type p to select the Patient DID option.
with data entry fields.
Refer to the following pages for
descriptions of each command on the
Patient DID Numbers screen.
To exit the Patient DID Numbers screen,
type q (quit).

Page 122

The MCS System Administration menu
displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Add Patient DID
Numbers

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Use the Add command on the Patient DID Number screen to add DID numbers to the
MCS database.

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Patient DID Numbers

***

DID Number:
State:
Stamped:
Starting Key:
Ending Key:

 to begin,  to Return to Command LIne

Add

Delete

View

Attendant Status

Print

Call

Quit

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-11 Add Patient DID Numbers

Assignment Process
During this assignment process, the supervisor indicates the range of DID numbers to
be added to MCS. Unique numbers within the range are added. Any number within the
indicated range that already exists in MCS is not added.

Procedure
Action

Type a to select the Add command.

Result

A window displays with prompts for the
starting key and ending key for valid DID
numbers.

Type the first new DID number to be added At the command line, the notation “Added
and press Enter, and type the last new DID ” displays each number
number to be added and press Enter.
within the given range as it is added and
placed in available status. Then, the cursor
is positioned on the command line.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 123

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Delete Patient
DID Numbers

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use the Delete command on the Patient DID Number screen to remove DID numbers
from the MCS database.

***

Patient DID Numbers

DID Number:
State:
Stamped:

Add

Delete

View

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***
(2)

Did Number

Print

Attendant Status

Status

Stamped

Enter DID Number:
Quit
 to search,  to return to command line
Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-12 Delete Patient DID Numbers

Procedure
Action

Type d to select the Delete command. (1)

Result

A DID number entry field displays at the
bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
heading displays at the top of the screen. (2)

Type the DID number and press Enter. To All of the matching names or numbers in
display all the DID numbers, press Enter the database display.
when the cursor is on the blank entry field.
Using the arrow keys, move the highlight to The field entries display and the message
the desired name or number and press
“Do you want to delete this? (Y/N)”
Enter.
displays at the bottom of the screen.
Type Y and press Enter to confirm the
If the deletion is confirmed, the word
deletion. Type N and press Enter to cancel “Deleted” displays in the Attendant Status
it.
Window. “Record not deleted” displays if
the deletion was cancelled. The cursor is
positioned on the command line.

Page 124

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

View Patient
DID Numbers

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Use the View command on the Patient DID Number screen to display DID numbers for
on-screen viewing or printing.

***

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Patient DID Numbers

***
(2)

DID Number:
State:
Stamped:

Starting Key:
Ending Key:
(3)

Top of
File to begin,  to Return to Command LIne
*** Patient DID Numbers ***

Did Number

Add

Delete

View

3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
Print

Status

Stamped

Offered
Offered
Available
Available
Pending
Active

08/10 10:16a
08/17 08:12a

Quit

08/14 08:21p
08/18 10:34a

More
Attendant Status

Call

Status

DownPage

Trnfr

UpPage

MCS Status

D
S Off-line
Search Top Bottom

Print

Quit

Figure 7-13 View Patient DID Numbers

Procedure
Action

Type v to select the View command. (1)

Result

A window displays with prompts for the
starting and ending keys for the search
range. (2)

To specify the range of records to be
All records lying within the given range
viewed, type the first record value and press display. (3)
Enter, and type the last and press Enter.
Use the DownPage command to move
forward one page, the UpPage command to
move back one page, the Top command to
move to the beginning of the display, and
the Bottom command to move to the end of
the display.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 125

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Action

Search the Display: Type s to select the
Search command. At the prompt, type the
desired pattern and press Enter.

Result

All records of the given pattern on that page
highlight.

Print the Display: Type p to select the Print There is a pause while the material is sent to
command. At the prompt, type f to print the the printer. Then, the command line returns.
whole file or s to print the screen and press
Enter.
To exit the display, type q (quit).

Page 126

The Patient DID Numbers screen
redisplays, and the cursor is positioned on
the command line.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Print Patient
DID Numbers

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Use the Print command on the Patient DID Number screen to print all or part of the
Patient DID Numbers in the database.

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Patient DID Numbers

DID Number:
State:
Stamped:

***

Starting Key:
Ending Key:

 to begin,  to Return to Command LIne

Add

Delete

View

Print

Attendant Status

Quit

Call

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-14 Print Patient DID Numbers

Procedure
Action

Type p to select the Print command.

Result

A window displays with prompts for the
starting and ending keys for the search
range.

To specify the range of records to be
All records within the given range are sent
printed, type the first record value and press to the printer, and the cursor is positioned
Enter, and type the last and press Enter.
on the command line.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 127

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Outstanding RSC Requests
Use the Outstanding RSC Requests option on the MCS System Administration menu
to manage RSC requests that were previously sent unsuccessfully to the PBX and were
entered into the database of outstanding RSC requests as a result.
(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

MCS

System Administration

***

RSC Descriptions
Extension Maintenance
Patient DID Numbers

(2)

Outstanding RSC Requests
Outstanding DID Requests
Quit

***

Outstanding RSC Requests

***

Extension:
:
Restriction:
Stamped:

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit
Resend
Delete
Attendant Status

Call

Status

View

Trnfr
D

S

Print

Quit

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-15 Outstanding RSC Requests

Outstanding
RSC Database

If an error occurs during an attempt to send a restriction class message to the PBX, the
RSC message is entered automatically into the database of outstanding RSC requests.
These outstanding requests remain in this database until the supervisor indicates their
disposition through this option.

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS System Administration menu, The Outstanding RSC Request screen
type o to select the Outstanding RSC
displays.
Requests option.
Refer to the following pages for
descriptions of each command on the
Outstanding RSC Requests screen.
To exit the Outstanding RSC Requests
screen, type q (quit).

Page 128

The MCS System Administration menu
displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Resend an RSC
Request

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Use the Resend command on the Outstanding RSC Requests screen to send an
outstanding restriction class message to the PBX that could not be sent previously.

***

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Outstanding RSC Requests

***

Extension:
Restriction:
Stamped:

(2)

Extension

Resend

Delete

View

Print

Attendant Status

Call

Rstr

Stamped

Quit
Enter Extension:
 to search,  to return to command line
Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
D

S

Off-line

Figure 7-16 Resend Outstanding RSC Request

Procedure
Action

Result

Type r to select the Resend command. (1)

An extension number entry field displays at
the bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
heading displays at the top of the screen. (2)

Type part or all of the extension number for The matching extensions display.
which the RSC request was originally sent
to the PBX. To display all the outstanding
RSC requests, press Enter when the cursor
is on the blank entry field.
Using the arrow keys, move the highlight to The RSC request is sent, the Outstanding
the desired extension and press Enter to
RSC Request screen displays, and the
resend the RSC request to the PBX.
cursor is positioned on the command line.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 129

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Delete an RSC
Request

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use the Delete command on the Outstanding RSC Requests screen to remove an RSC
request from the outstanding RSC file.
Note:

Use this command if you have removed the extension.

***

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Outstanding RSC Requests

***

Extension:
Restriction:
Stamped:

(2)

Extension

Resend

Delete

View

Print

Attendant Status

Call

Rstr

Stamped

Quit
Enter Extension:
 to search,  to return to command line
Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
D

S

Off-line

Figure 7-17 Delete Outstanding RSC Request

Procedure
Action

Type d to select the Delete command. (1)

Result

An extension number entry field displays at
the bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
heading displays at the top of the screen. (2)

Type all or part of the extension number for The matching extensions display.
which the RSC request was originally sent
to the PBX. To display all of the
outstanding RSC requests, press Enter on
the blank entry field.
Using the arrow keys, move the highlight to The message “Do you want to delete this?
the desired extension and press Enter.
(Y/N)” displays at the bottom of the screen.
Type Y and press Enter to confirm the
deletion; type N and press Enter to cancel
it.

Page 130

If the deletion is confirmed, the word
“Deleted” displays in the Attendant Status
Window. “Record not deleted” displays if
the deletion was cancelled. The cursor is
positioned on the command line.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

View
Outstanding
RSC Requests

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Use the View command on the Outstanding RSC Requests screen to display
outstanding RSC requests for on-screen viewing or printing.

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Outstanding RSC Requests

Extension:
Restriction:
Stamped:

(1)

***

(2)

Starting Key:
Ending Key:
(3)


to begin,  to Return to Command LIne
Top
of File
*** Outstanding RSC Requests ***

Resend

Delete

Attendant Status

View

Extension

Rstr

Stamped

3601
3688
3692

12
10
12

08/10 10:16a
08/17 08:12a
08/15 11:16p

Print
Quit
End of File
Call

Status

Trnfr
D

DownPage

UpPage

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Search

Top

Bottom

Print

Quit

Figure 7-18 View Outstanding RSC Requests

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 131

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Procedure
Action

Type v to select the View command. (1)

Result

A window displays prompts for the starting
and ending keys for the search range. (2)

Type the starting extension number and the All records within the given range display.
ending extension number, pressing Enter
after each.
Use the DownPage command to move
forward one page, the UpPage command to
move back one page, the Top command to
move to the beginning of the display, and
the Bottom command to move to the end of
the display.
Search the Display: Type s to select the
Search command. At the prompt, type the
desired pattern and press Enter.

All occurrences of the given pattern on that
page are highlighted.

Print the Display: Type p to select the Print There is a pause while the material is sent to
command. At the prompt, type f to print the the printer. Then the cursor is positioned on
whole file or s to print the screen and press the command line.
Enter.
To exit the Outstanding RSC Request
display, type q (quit).

Page 132

The Outstanding RSC Requests screen
displays, and the cursor is positioned on the
command line.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Print
Outstanding
RSC Requests

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Use the Print command on the Outstanding RSC Request screen to print all or part of
the outstanding RSC requests in the database.

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Outstanding RSC Requests

Extension:
Restriction:
Stamped:

***

Starting Key:
Ending Key:

 to begin,  to Return to Command LIne

Resend

Delete

View

Attendant Status

Print

Call

Quit

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-19 Print Outstanding RSC Requests

Procedure
Action

Type p to select the Print command.

Result

A window displays with prompts for the
starting and ending keys for the search
range.

Type the first record value and press Enter, All records within the given range are sent
and type the last and press Enter.
to the printer, and the cursor is positioned
on the command line.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 133

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Outstanding DID Requests
Use the Outstanding DID Requests option on the MCS System Administration menu
to manage DID requests that were unsuccessfully sent to the PBX and were entered into
the database of outstanding DID requests as a result.

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

MCS

System Administration

***
(2)

RSC Descriptions
Extension Maintenance
Patient DID Numbers
Outstanding RSC Requests
Outstanding DID Requests
Quit

***

Call

Status

***

DID Number:
:
Extension:
Restriction:
Extension:
DID Number:
Restriction:
Remove DID:
Stamped:

Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit
Resend
Attendant Status

Outstanding DID Requests

Delete

Trnfr
D

S

View

Print

Quit

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-20 Outstanding DID Requests

Outstanding
DID Database

If an error occurs when a message about a DID change is sent to the PBX, the message
is entered automatically into the database of outstanding DID requests. These
outstanding requests remain in this database until the supervisor indicates their
disposition through this option.

Display Fields

The records in the DID display show whether the DID number involved in the
transaction is to be made available for future use (removed) or is to remain active. This
table reflects the Logical/Physical table used by the PBX. There are two sets of DID
numbers and two sets of extensions listed per entry. The first set indicates where the
DID number is to be routed, and the second set indicates what happens to the old
extension, such as restoring it to a discharged restriction and clearing the patient’s DID
from its table.

Page 134

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Procedure

Action

Result

On the MCS System Administration menu, The Outstanding DID Requests screen
type u to select the Outstanding DID
displays.
Requests option.
Refer to the following pages for a
description of each command on the
Outstanding DID Requests screen.
To exit the Outstanding DID Requests
screen, type q (quit).

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The MCS System Administration menu
displays.

Page 135

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Resend a DID
Request

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use the Resend command on the Outstanding DID Requests screen to send an
outstanding DID message to the PBX that could not be sent previously.

(1)

***

Outstanding DID Requests

Delete

***
(2)

DID Number:
:
Extension:
Restriction:
Extension:
DID Number:
Restriction:
Remove DID:
Stamped:

Resend

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

DID

View

Ext

Print

Attendant Status

Call

Quit

Rstr

Ext

DID

Rstr

Remove

Stamped

Enter DID Number:

 to search,  to return to command line
Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
D

S

Off-line

Figure 7-21 Resend Outstanding DID Request

Procedure
Action

Result

Press Enter to select the Resend command. An extension number entry field displays at
(1)
the bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
heading displays at the top of the screen. (2)
Type the DID number in the entry field and The matching DID requests display.
press Enter. To display all the outstanding
DID requests, press Enter when the cursor
is on the blank entry field.
Using the arrow keys, move the highlight to The DID request is sent, the Outstanding
the desired DID request. Press Enter to
DID Requests screen displays, and the
resend the request to the PBX.
cursor is positioned on the command line.

Page 136

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Delete a DID
Request

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Use the Delete command on the Outstanding DID Requests screen to remove a
DID request from the file of outstanding DID requests.

(1)

***

Outstanding DID Requests

Delete

***
(2)

DID Number:
:
Extension:
Restriction:
Extension:
DID Number:
Restriction:
Remove DID:
Stamped:

Resend

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

DID

View

Attendant Status

Ext

Print

Call

Quit

Rstr

Ext

DID

Rstr

Remove

Stamped

Enter DID Number:

 to search,  to return to command line
Status
Trnfr
MCS Status
D

S

Off-line

Figure 7-22 Delete Outstanding DID Request

Procedure
Action

Type d to select the Delete command. (1)

Result

An extension number entry field displays at
the bottom of the screen, and a highlighted
heading displays at the top of the screen. (2)

Type the DID number to the entry field and The matching DID requests display.
press Enter. To display all the outstanding
DID requests, press Enter when the cursor
is on the blank entry field.
Using the arrow keys, move the highlight to The message “Do you want to delete this?
the desired DID request and press Enter.
(Y/N)” displays at the bottom of the screen.
Type Y and press Enter to confirm the
If deletion is confirmed, the word
deletion. Type N and press Enter to cancel “Deleted” displays in the Attendant Status
it.
Window. “Record not deleted” displays if
the deletion was cancelled. The cursor is
positioned on the command line.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 137

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

View Outstanding
DID Requests

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use the View command on the Outstanding DID Requests screen to display
outstanding DID requests for viewing or printing.

***

Outstanding DID Requests

DID Number:
:
Extension:
Restriction:
Extension:
DID Number:
Restriction:
Remove DID:
Stamped:

Resend

Delete

View

Attendant Status

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

(2)

Starting Key:
Ending Key:
(3)

 to begin,  to Return to Command LIne
Top of File
*** Outstanding DID Requests ***

DID

Ext

Rstr

Ext

DID

Rstr

4601
4688
4692

3300
3644
3045

12
10
12

3300
3644
3692

4601
4633
4692

12
10
12

Remove
No
Yes
Yes

Stamped
08/10 10:16a
08/17 08:12a
08/15 11:16p

Print
Quit
End of File
Call

Status

DownPage

MCS Status

Trnfr
UpPage

D
S
Search

Off-line
Top Bottom

Print

Quit

Figure 7-23 View Outstanding DID Requests

Procedure
Action

Type v to select the View command. (1)

Result

A window displays prompts for the starting
and ending keys for the search range. (2)

Type the starting extension number and the All records within the given range display
ending extension number, pressing Enter for viewing.
after each.
Use the DownPage command to move
forward one page, the UpPage command to
move back one page, the Top command to
move to the beginning of the display, and
the Bottom command to move to the end of
the display.

Action

Page 138

Result

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Search the Display: Type s to select the
Search command. At the prompt, type the
desired pattern and press Enter.

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

All occurrences of the given pattern on that
page highlight.

Print the Display: Type p to select the Print There is a pause while the material is sent to
command. At the prompt, type f to print the the printer. Then the cursor is positioned on
whole file or s to print the screen and press the command line.
Enter.
To exit the Outstanding DID Request
display, type q (quit).

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The Outstanding DID Requests screen
displays, and the cursor is positioned on the
command line.

Page 139

SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Print Outstanding
DID Requests

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Use the Print command on the Outstanding DID Request screen to print all or part
of the outstanding DID requests in the database.

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

Outstanding DID Requests

DID Number:
:
Extension:
Restriction:
Extension:
DID Number:
Restriction:
Remove DID:
Stamped:

Resend

Delete

View

Attendant Status

***

Starting Key:
Ending Key:

 to begin,  to Return to Command LIne

Print

Call

Quit

Status

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
Off-line

Figure 7-24 Print Outstanding DID Requests

Procedure
Action

Type p to select the Print command.

Result

A window displays with prompts for the
starting and ending keys for the search
range.

Type the first record value and press Enter, All records within the given range are sent
and type the last and press Enter.
to the printer, and the cursor is positioned
on the command line.

Page 140

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 8

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
Use the Configuration Management option on the Main Menu to change or print
configuration parameters that are under supervisor control.

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

***

(1)

Main Menu ***

(2)

Operator Functions
Database Administration
System Administration

***

Configuration

Management

***

Configuration Management
Discharges Removed (hours):
Login Name Maintenance
DID Dest. for Discharged Patients:
Supervisor Reports
Restriction for Patients with no Srv:
Quit
Restriction for Patient Phone Service:
Att Name Label (include ’#’):
Default Transfer Type:
Patient Room Displayed Field #1:
Patient Room Displayed Field #1:
Operator Database Access:
Max Records from Queries:
Hot Key to Sub-directories:
Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit
One Key Stroke to Execute Commands:
Oper access to Confidential Patients:

Attendant Status

Call Status

Trnfr
Modify

Print
D S

72
0
Local-3
Local-1
ATT#
Direct
Account_Number
Nurse_Station
No
40
Yes
Yes

MCS Status
Quit
Off-line

Figure 8-1 Platform Management

Displayed Parameters
These configuration parameters give the supervisor some choices in managing the
system. The supervisor can alter aspects of operator functions and the operator
screen display. Figure 8-1 contains the default values entered during installation of
the MCS. Enter a zero value in a time-out field to turn off the timer.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 141

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Procedure
Action

On the MCS Main Menu, type c to select
the Configuration Management option.

Result

The Configuration Management screen
displays.

To Change the Parameters:
Type m to select the Modify command. Use
the arrow keys to move among fields and
press Enter after each entry to change the
fields, as described below:
Field Name
Discharges Removed

Definition
Amount of time in hours that a patient room
record remains in the MCS database once it
has been changed to a status of Discharged.
When this timeout occurs, MCS
automatically removes the record from the
database. This timeout also affects DID
numbers that have been offered but for
which there has not been a patient record to
change their status to Pending or Active.

DID Dest. for Discharged Patients

The number that is called when calls arrive
for discharged patients who still have DIDs.

Restriction for Patient with no Srv

The description of the RSC value to which
the phone is set for a patient who has not
contracted for phone service. The value
described here is found through the RSC
Description option on the MCS System
Administration menu.

Restriction for Patient Phone Service

The description of the RSC value to which
patient phone service is set. The value
corresponding to this description is found
through the RSC Description option on the
MCS System Administration menu.

Att Name Label

Name by which all attendant stations are
known. The name can be anything as long
as it contains a # sign that MCS replaces
with the attendant number.
Note:

Default Transfer Type

Page 142

The name of the supervisor station is
static and does not need to be set here.

Default type of transfer displayed on the
screen and performed through the Directory
Assistance window. (Direct or screen)

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT

Action

To Change the Parameters: (Cont)
Field Name
Patient Room Displayed Field (1 & 2)

Result

Definition
The fields displayed in the two extra lines in
the Source Caller window from among all
of the fields in the patient room record.
When the cursor is moved to this field, a
pop-up window displays a list of fields that
may be selected for the Source Caller
window. Use the space bar to position the
highlight on the desired field and press
Enter to select it.

Operator Database Option

Whether an operator is allowed access to
the Database Administration option from
the MCS Main Menu, using the following
options:
Yes: Type an operator password to
display the MCS Main Menu.
No: Type an operator password to
display the Operator Functions
screen without passing through
the MCS Main Menu first.

Max Records from Queries

The largest number of records that are ever
displayed for the entered pattern when a
search has been performed. This value is
used to prevent accidental searches of the
whole database that might take several
minutes.

Hot Key to Sub-directories

The key that the operator can type as the
first character of the name or room in the
Directory Assistance lookup to display a
list of the sub-directories, or types of
records, in the database. Select a specific
type of record for a faster and more efficient
search.
Note:

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The character @ will cause the subdirectory look-up screen to appear
immediately after the Directory function is activated.

Page 143

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Action

To Change the Parameters: (Cont)
Field Name
One Key Stroke to Execute Commands

Oper access to Confidential Patients

To Print the Parameters:
Type p to select the Print command.

Result

Definition
Whether choice of menu options and
commands is made by pressing the
highlighted letter only (Yes) or by pressing
the highlighted letter and then pressing
Enter (No).
Whether operators may view the listings of
confidential patients when using Directory
Assistance.
The displayed parameters are sent to the
printer configured for the MCS.

To exit the display, press Esc to return to the The MCS Main Menu displays.
command line and type q (quit).

Page 144

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 9

LOGIN NAME MAINTENANCE

LOGIN NAME MAINTENANCE
Use the Login Name Management option on the MCS Main Menu to add, delete,
and modify login names and passwords and to print and view operator names.
Login names are used when generating all reports in the MCS.

***

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Main Menu ***

Operator Functions
Database Administration

(2)

***

Login

Name Maintenance

***

System Administration
Configuration Management
Login Name Maintenance
Supervisor Reports

Operator
Supervisor
Quit

(3)

Quit
***

Operator Login Names

***

Operator Name:
Password:
Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit
Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit

Attendant Status

Call Status

Trnfr

MCS Status

D

Off-line

Add

S

Delete

Modify

View

Print

Quit

Figure 9-1 Login Name Maintenance

Option Overview
You can use this option to alter names and/or passwords for the operators and the
supervisor. Select the Operator option to display prompts for the operator name
and the password for that operator. Select the Supervisor option to display
prompts for entry of the supervisor name and the password for the supervisor. All
internal MCS operator names and passwords must be entered via this option. Any
number of operator names can be added, deleted, changed, viewed, and printed.
However, only one supervisor login name and password may exist at any time.
MCS is installed with a default supervisor login name and password; thus, the only
commands available on the Supervisor Login Name screen are Modify and Quit.
Both of the supervisor commands function in the same manner as they do on the
Operator Login Name screen.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 145

LOGIN NAME MAINTENANCE

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Search Function
Unlike other search functions in MCS, the operator name must be entered in full. MCS
does not retrieve and display operator names from partial entries.

View Function
The View command displays a list of all current attendant login names that are stored
in MCS. This list can also be printed.

Procedure
The following procedure describes both operator and supervisor login name functions.
Remember, while operator login names can be added, deleted, changed, viewed, or
printed, the single supervisor login name can only be changed, as shown in the
procedure below.
Action

Result

On the MCS Main Menu, type l to select the The Login Name Maintenance screen
Login Name Maintenance option.
displays for selection of operator or
supervisor login name.
Type the highlighted letter of the desired
option.

To Add an Operator
Type a to select the Add command.

The login name screen for the chosen
option displays. If you selected Operator,
the command line displays options to add,
delete, modify, view, or print. If you
selected Supervisor, the command line
displays only the option to modify.
The cursor is positioned on the Operator
Name field.

Type the full name or number of the new
The message “Do you want to insert this?
operator (up to eight alphanumeric
(Y/N)” displays.
characters) and press Enter. Then, type the
password (up to ten alphanumeric
characters) and press Enter.
Type Y and press Enter to save the operator The notation “Inserted” or “Record not
addition. Type N to cancel it.
inserted” displays under Attendant Status.
The cursor is positioned on the command
line.

Page 146

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Action

To Delete an Operator
Type d to select the Delete command.

LOGIN NAME MAINTENANCE

Result

The cursor is positioned on the Operator
Name field.

Type the name or number of the operator to The message “Do you want to delete this?
be deleted from the database and press
(Y/N)” displays.
Enter.

Type Y and press Enter to confirm the
The notation “Deleted” or “Record not
deletion. Type N and press Enter to cancel deleted” displays under Attendant Status
it.
and the cursor is positioned on the
command line.
To Change an Operator or Supervisor
Login
Type m to select the Modify command.

The cursor is positioned on the Operator
Name field.

Type the full name or number of the
operator whose login is to be changed and
press Enter.

If the entry is valid, the cursor moves to the
password field for data entry.

Make a new entry to the password field as
required and press Enter.

A message displays on the command line
for confirmation before saving the changes.

Type Y(es) to save the changes or N(o) to
cancel the changes. Press Enter after either
entry.
To View All Operator Login Names
Type v to select the View command.

The Operator Login Names screen displays
the list of operators by name.

Use the DownPage command to move
forward through the pages, the UpPage
command to move back through the pages,
the Top command to move directly to the
beginning of the list, and the Bottom
command to move directly to the end of the
list.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 147

LOGIN NAME MAINTENANCE

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Top of File

*** Operator Login Names ***

amy
john
terry

End of File

DownPage

UpPage

Search

Top

Bottom

Print

Quit

Figure 9-2 View Operator Login Names

Action

Result

Search the Display: Type s to select the
The display is moved as necessary to show
Search command. At the prompt, type the the desired name or number in highlight.
full name or number of the desired operator
and press Enter.
Print the Display: Type p to select the Print There is a pause while the file or screen is
command. At the prompt on the command sent to the printer. The cursor is positioned
line, type f to print the whole file or s to
on the command line.
print just the screen and press Enter.
To Print the Displayed Login Name and
Password
Type p to select the Print command.

Page 148

The Operator Name and Password
currently displayed is sent to the printer.

To exit the Operator Login Names screen,
type q (quit).

The Login Name Maintenance screen
displays and the cursor is positioned on the
command line.

To exit the Login Name Maintenance
screen, type q (quit).

The MCS Main Menu displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 10

SUPERVISOR REPORTS

SUPERVISOR REPORTS
Use the Supervisor Reports option on the MCS Main Menu to view daily
statistics on operator activity. Error messages are added to the end of each day’s
file for easy access and display.

***

(1)

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

Supervisor

Medical Center System

Main Menu ***
(2)

***

Supervisor

Reports

***

Operator Functions
Database Administration

error log
08.16
08.15
Top of File
Configuration Management
*** Operator
Statistics Report ***
08.14
Login Name Maintenance
08/16
08.13
Supervisor Reports
08.12
08.11Internal
Quit
External
Dir
08.10Answered
Operator
Login
Logout
Answered
Assist
08.09
232
555
123
amy
09:00a 12:00p
234
403
322
01:04p 03:00p
357
958
554
4h55
d next page, u previous page,
>

System Administration

12:00p 01:00p
01:55p 06:66p
Arrow keys to move cursor,  to select,  to quit
5h05
12:13a
julie
Call Status 02:23a
04:30a

Attendant Status

02:00a
04:14a
06:02a
5h10

145
683
828

132
412
544

john

101
Trnfr12
54
167
D S

123
72
MCS Status
115
310
Off-line

(3)

Park
23
55
78

Rtrv
21
50
71

16
317
333

3
66
69

3
62
65

52
9
32
93

87
13
23
123

72
7
17
96

More
DownPage

UpPage

Top

Bottom

Search

Print

Quit

Figure 10-1 Supervisor Reports

Date-Stamped Files
Select this option to display a menu of date-stamped files for viewing. The dates
show the period of time covered by the statistics in the file. Each night at midnight
the statistics gathered since the previous night at midnight are saved in a file named
with the month and day of those statistics. For example, the statistics gathered from
August 15 at midnight until August 16 at midnight are stored in a file named 08.16.
The current day’s statistics are not available for viewing until midnight, when they
are formatted and stored. These files are stored in the system for two weeks after
their date-stamp. Then, they are automatically deleted.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 149

SUPERVISOR REPORTS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Operator Statistics
When a report is chosen for viewing, the following statistics are displayed for each
operator:
Login

The time that the operator logged into the MCS and the
Operator Functions screen.

Logout

The time that the operator logged out of the Operator
Functions screen.

Internal Answered

The number of internal calls answered by the operator while
in On-Line or Park-off status.

External Answered

The number of external calls answered by an operator while in
On-Line or Park-off status.

Dir. Assist

The total number of directory assistance transfers performed
by this operator.

Park

The total number of calls parked by this operator.

Rtrv.

The total number of parked calls retrieved and connected to
the paged party by this operator.

Totals are shown, by operator, for logged-in time and for the remaining columns.

Page 150

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

SUPERVISOR REPORTS

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS main Menu, type u to select
the Supervisor Reports option. (1)

The Supervisor Reports screen displays a
list of dates, each representing a daily report
of operator activity. (2)

Select the desired report date and press
Enter.

The report displays. (3)

Use the DownPage command to move
forward through the pages, the UpPage
command to move back through the pages,
the Top command to move directly to the
beginning of the display, and the Bottom
command to move directly to the end of the
display.
Search the Display: Type s to select the
Search command. Type a pattern of letters
and/or numbers that contains up to eight
characters. Then press Enter.

Every occurrence of the pattern highlights
in the displayed report.

Print the Display: Type p to select the Print
command. At the prompt on the command There is a pause while the file or screen is
line, type f to print the whole file or s to
sent to the printer, and the cursor is
print just the screen and press Enter.
positioned on the command line.
To exit the selected report display, type q to
select the Quit command.
The Supervisor Reports menu displays.
To exit the Supervisor Reports menu, press The MCS Main Menu displays.
Esc.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 151

SUPERVISOR REPORTS

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page 152

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 11

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES
This chapter contains a listing of the messages that may be displayed throughout
MCS. A brief description follows each message. Some include required recovery
maneuvers.
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
# more source caller record(s).

attwinmsg

More source callers are associated with this extension. Press up- and downarrow keys to view the list.
 is using RSC ,
description has been restored.

attwinmsg

MCS tried to clear the description of a restriction that is being used for an
extension.
A record already exists for this group and time.

Ioerr

It is not possible to schedule two changes at the same time for the same group.
Account field cannot be empty.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to leave the account field blank.
Account number is not unique.

attwinmsg

A patient has already been assigned this account number. Use another.
Age is all numeric or it ends in ‘m’ or ‘d’.

attwinmsg

Do not leave the age field blank. Use the pound sign (#) followed by an ‘m’ for
months or ‘d’ for days, if needed.
Alert from .

attwinmsg

This message is displayed on the supervisor’s console, before its Dterm is
answered, after an operator has given a supervisor alert.
Alerting the supervisor.

attwinmsg

This message confirms that the supervisor is being alerted.
Apinform erred on server, see APM log.

errmsg

An attempt to get OAI application information has failed. Refer to the APM
error log through the APM Operations Menu.
APM send error.

Cmnerr

The administrator should check the APM log to see that the Monitor and Server
components are both initialized.
Apmsend error, see APM log records.

errmsg

An error occurred while a message was being sent to an OAI application. Refer
to the APM error log on the APM Operations Menu. (This is displayed as
“Apmsend error, see APM log records” in the error log. Refer to the APM error
log through the APM Operations Menu.)

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 153

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Attempting to call .
This message displays the extension number when a call is being attempted.
Attendant Id must be between 1 and .

attwinmsg

This message gives the range within which the attendant ID number must fall. This
means that the entered ID is outside the range.
Attendant name must be unique.

DBermsg

This name has already been entered. Someone may have added it before it was
added here.
Bed must be between 0 and 2.

attwinmsg

Entered bed number is not acceptable. 0 means private; 1 and 2 mean semi-private
room.
Bed not entered for rooms without extensions.

attwinmsg

This is a reminder that if a room is entered without an extension, no bed is to be
entered.
Calling .

attwinmsg

The listed extension has been successfully re-dialed.
Calling beeper.

attwinmsg

The beeper has been called.
Calling emergency number.

attwinmsg

After an emergency notification, the number to the selected emergency team or
agency is being called.
Cannot assign another bed to a private room.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to add a bed assignment to a room that already has a bed
‘0’, meaning a private room.
Cannot assign bed 0 to a non-private room.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to assign a ‘0’ bed to a room that has previously been
assigned as non-private.
Cannot delete a DID group assigned within a DID schedule.

Ioerr

Removing a DID group with a corresponding schedule is prohibited. Remove the
scheduled changes for this DID group, and then retry.
Cannot delete an RSC group if it used within an RSC schedule.

Ioerr

Removing an RSC group with a corresponding schedule is prohibited. Remove the
scheduled changes for this RSC group, and then retry.
Cannot park another attendant.

attwinmsg

MCS does not support parking of an attendant by a fellow attendant.
Checking that RSC  is not being used, one moment. attwinmsg
This is a status message that is displayed while changing an RSC description.

Page 154

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Complete

attwinmsg

Directory assistance or call parking succeeded.
Complete, but cannot release you.

attwinmsg

Manually press release or cancel.
Conversation monitoring ended.

attwinmsg

The supervisor who was monitoring the conversation hung up the Dterm and is no
longer monitoring.
Database Errors:

errmsg

The following errors occur in the database. The administrator should look in the
MCS error log for the exact 9000 or 10000 level error. If it is in the 10000 level, the
last 3 digits are the Informix error code. The first phrase below is the manner in
which the message is displayed, and the second phrase is the second is the manner
in which they are referred to in the error log. Each of these error statements are listed
elsewhere alphabetically.
Operator Screen Display

Error Log Display

Error putting request in database.
Error creating MCS database [MCSdb].
Error inserting record.
Error inserting a record into the database.
DB error when finding attendant.
Error when finding attendant in database.
DB error when finding beep code. Error when finding beeper code in database.
Database deletion error.
Error deleting a record from the database.
Directory database lookup error. Error when doing directory lookup in database.
Error locking a record in the db.
Error locking a record in the database.
Error unlocking database record.
Fatal error unlocking database record.
Error matching an RSC in the db.
Error matching an RSC in the database.
Database error modifying record.
Error modifying a record in the database.
Err finding name of paged party. Error when finding recalled park record in db.
Error querying the database.
Error querying the database.
DB error when finding source clr. Error when finding source caller in database.
DB error when finding trunk.
Error when finding trunk in database.
Wrong type returned from dblookup. Error in type returned from database lookup.
Error building MCS database indexes [MCSdb].
Error droppng MCS database indexes [MCSdb].
Error rebuilding MCS database indexes [MCSdb].
Database deletion error.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Database error modifying record.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Date must be in form .

attwinmsg

Expected form is mm/dd.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 155

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Day is out of range.

attwinmsg

The entered day is not in the month; try again.
DB error when finding attendant.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
DB error when finding beep code.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
DB error when finding source clr.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
DB error when finding trunk.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
DID group does not exist.

DBermsg

An attempt has been made to schedule something (DID/RSC change) for a group or
time index that does not exist.
DID is already in use.

attwinmsg

This DID number is not being used by a patient, even though it has been entered for
a patient.
DID is not available for use.

attwinmsg

This DID number has not been allocated for use, even though it has been entered for
a patient.
DID must be all numeric.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to enter a DID that was not all numeric.
DID number does not exist.

attwinmsg

This DID number is not in the pool; ask the administrator to add it if it is a valid
number.
DID number no longer available.

errmsg

This DID is currently in use by another patient or waiting for the configured time to
be put back into the available pool.
Directory database lookup error.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Directory service not available.

errmsg

The attempt to get the OAI application information failed. Refer to the APM error
log through the APM Operations Menu. (Displayed as “Apinform errored on server,
see APM log.” in error log; refer to APM error log through the APM Operations
Menu.)
Emergency station is ringing.

attwinmsg

This message is displayed after an emergency notification.
Err finding name of paged party./

Page 156

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Error when finding recalled park record in db.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Errno > sys_nerr.

Cmnerr

UNIX error message is too large to print its corresponding text.
Error building MCS database indexes [MCSdb].

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error checking use of RSC ,
description has been restored.

attwinmsg

A problem occurred while checking a blanked out RSC description; the previous
non-blank description has been restored.
Error creating MCS database [MCSdb].

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error deleting a record from the database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error droppng MCS database indexes [MCSdb].

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error in file size expected.

Cmnerr

This circumstance is unlikely to occur. If it does, look at the MCS error log for the
filename.
Error in menu command.

errmsg

An error occurred while the application was trying to implement a menu command
such as displaying a file.
Error in multiple screen program

errmsg

Ask the administrator to make sure that a file exists for this terminal so that screen
switching is possible. (Displayed as “Error initializing multiple screen program in
errlog.” in errlog; refer to APM error log through the APM Operations Menu.)
Error in type returned from database lookup.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.“
Error inserting a record into the database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error locking a record in the db. /
Error locking a record in the database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error matching an RSC in the db /
Error matching an RSC in the database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 157

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Error modifying a record in the database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error putting request in database. (DID)

errmsg

An outstanding DID record has been inserted into the database so that when the
Mcs_Monitor component is initialized, a request will be made to the PBX. See
“Database Errors.”
Error putting request in database. (RSC)

errmsg

An outstanding restriction class change has been inserted into the database so that
when Mcs_Monitor is initialized, it will send a request to the PBX. See “Database
Errors.”
Error querying the database./ Error querying the database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error rebuilding MCS database indexes [mcsdb].

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error unlocking database record.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error when doing directory lookup in database

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error when finding attendant in database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error when finding beeper code in database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error when finding source caller in database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Error when finding trunk in database.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
Extension does not exist or is a patient ext.

attwinmsg

When employee records, internal records, etc., are entered, the entered extension is
either already assigned as a patient extension or does not exist.
Extension is already a(n) .

attwinmsg

When an extension record is entered, the extension is already assigned elsewhere.
Extension is not an Att. Console Extension.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to assign an extension to an attendant when it has not
been assigned as an attendant extension.
Fatal error unlocking database record.

errmsg

See “Database Errors.”

Page 158

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

First character cannot be a space or null.

attwinmsg

The operator must do something other than insert blanks or press RETURN.
Going off-line due to error.

errmsg

The application went off line because an outstanding sequence was found. Ask the
administrator to check the UNIX queues.
Invalid deletion, extension currently assigned to user.

DBermsg

User (i.e., patient, employee, etc.) must be deleted before the extension assigned to
that user can be deleted.
Invalid deletion, DID group currently assigned in schedule.

DBermsg

Delete the group index from the schedule, and then retry.
Invalid deletion, RSC group currently assigned in schedule.

DBermsg

Delete the group index from the schedule, and then retry.
Invalid deletion, Time index currently assigned in schedule.

DBermsg

Delete the time index from the schedule, and then retry.
Invalid extension for directory entry.

DBermsg

An attempt has been made to add an employee, patient, etc. with an extension that
no longer exists.
Invalid Login Name.

attwinmsg

Try again, perhaps typing in upper- or lowercase letters.
Invalid Password.

attwinmsg

Try again; check with the administrator about the password.
Joining parked and paged parties.

attwinmsg

An attempt is being made to retrieve requested parked and paged parties.
Minor error when receiving data.

errmsg

Part of the incoming message did not match what MCS expected in the message.
This is a minor problem that will not interrupt processing; keep going.
Monitoring .

attwinmsg

The attendant number on the monitoring supervisor’s station when an operator alert
is successful and the supervisor Dterm is answered.
Month must be 01 to 12.

attwinmsg

Entered month lies outside of the number of months in the year.
No caller from which to take msg.

attwinmsg

The Message function has been selected when no incoming call has been answered.
No color capabilities available.

errmsg

The terminal type (vt100, etc.) does not support color.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 159

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

No members in group.

Cmnerr

Regardless of the scheduled change, this group has no members. It is probably best
to delete the scheduled change.
No Patient Extension for this room.

attwinmsg

If there should be, ask the administrator to add the patient extension; otherwise,
continue input without filling in a bed.
No Patient Extension for this room and bed.

attwinmsg

A patient extension exists for this room, but not for this bed.
No server available.

Cmnerr

An attendant attempted to go on-line when the maximum number of attendants were
already logged on.
No source caller for monitoring.

attwinmsg

The supervisor monitoring function has been attempted when no incoming call has
been answered.
No source caller for parking.

attwinmsg

The Parking function has been attempted when no incoming call has been answered.
No statistics records to format.

errmsg

There are no statistics yet from which to format records.
No such group.

Cmnerr

An RSC/DID schedule has an unknown group assigned; this circumstance is
unlikely to occur.
Park service not available.

attwinmsg

Directory assistance, beeper, emergency services are still available.
Park service unavailable.

Cmnerr

Communication with the PBX is down.
Parked call time-out [#].

attwinmsg

The number of callers rerouted to this attendant because they have been parked
beyond the time configured for parked calls.
Parking caller.

attwinmsg

The caller is being parked as shown.
Patient discharged can’t transfr.

attwinmsg

An attempt was made to transfer a caller to a patient who has been discharged.
Patient extension must be unique.

DBermsg

This extension has been used; someone may have added this extension before it was
added here.

Page 160

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Query max exceeded.

Cmnerr

If this is a problem, increase the maximum value through the MCS Configuration
Management Menu.
Recall list is full.

Cmnerr

Check MCS configuration database on APM and increase recall list parameters,
have operators log off, terminate MCS_Monitor and MCS_Server components,
remove configured MCS shared memory, and reinitialize.
Record does not exist.

DBermsg

This record is not in the database.
Record exists, to make changes use modify.

attwinmsg

An attempt was made to add a record that according to its key field already exists.
The record can only be changed or the screen exited and the field re-entered.
Resetting parked time-out number.

errmsg

The application did not find an empty park time-out slot. This problem is not major
and will not interrupt processing; keep going.
Restoring DID, no longer valid.

attwinmsg

The DID number entered for a patient was offered, but has since been used by
someone else.
Restoring DID, problem locking it.

attwinmsg

The DID number is may not be unique, or there may be a database problem. Try
again. Ask the administrator to check log for database error description.
Restoring DID, problem modifying it.

attwinmsg

There is a database problem; try again. Ask the administrator to check the log for a
database error description.
Room already in use for a patient extension.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to add a patient extension to a room that is already used
for another patient extension.
Room already used for a non-patient extension.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to insert a room for a patient extension that is already
being used for a non-patient station such as an attendant, a nursing unit, etc.
Room and bed already used for an extension.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to add a patient extension with a room and bed that are
already assigned to another patient extension.
RSC group does not exist.

DBermsg

An attempt has been made to schedule something (DID/RSC change) for a group or
time index that does not exist.
Source caller cannot have msgs.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to take a message for a non-patient party.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 161

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Supervisor emergencies ignore alternate extension.

attwinmsg

To enter an emergency record for supervisor alerts, no second extension is needed
(or used).
Supervisor is not logged in.

attwinmsg

The message tells the operator who began a supervisor alert that although the
supervisor Dterm is ringing, the supervisor is not logged onto an attendant console.
Supervisor now monitoring convrs.

attwinmsg

This message tells the operator who began a supervisor alert that the supervisor has
answered and is monitoring the conversation.
Time index does not exist.

DBermsg

An attempt has been made to schedule something (DID/RSC change) for a group or
time index that does not exist.
Time index must be between 1 and .

Ioerr

The entered index is out of range; try again.
The unit must be one configured as a nurse’s station extension.

DBermsg

Someone may have deleted the nurse’s station extension for this unit on another
console before it was saved here.
The unit must be unique for each nurse’s station extension.

DBermsg

This extension seems to already have an assigned unit; perhaps one was added just
before this one.
The room and bed must be unique.

DBermsg

An attempt has been made to add a patient extension whose room and bed are being
used by another.
The  cannot be the first character.

attwinmsg

The pound sign (#) cannot be the first character entered for the attendant label or
name in the Configuration Management Menu.
This bed is not available.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to assign a patient to a room with a bed that is already in
use.
This number must be greater than zero.

attwinmsg

Try again with a larger number.
This room already has max allowed extensions.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to add a patient extension to a room that has already been
assigned its maximum allowed extension(s), such as 1 for private room.
This room does not have any available beds.

attwinmsg

An attempt has been made to assign a patient to a room whose beds are already
assigned.

Page 162

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

This tty not configured.

errmsg

Ask the administrator to change the tty (terminal) file in the MCS directory to
include this tty.
Too many entries in database.

Cmnerr

More than one RSC/DID group has been found in the database. This is unlikely
to occur.
Transferring caller.

attwinmsg

The caller is being transferred.
Transferred from an attendant.

attwinmsg

The call just answered is an interposition attendant transfer.
Unit already exists for a nurse station extension.

attwinmsg

While a nursing station extension was being added, an attempt was made to
enter a unit that is already being used for another nursing extension.
Unit not assigned for a nurse station extension.

attwinmsg

An assignment has been made to a unit that has not been assigned as a unit. If
it is a valid unit, ask the administrator to add a unique ‘master’ extension for
this nursing unit.
Wrong type returned from dblookup.

Errmsg

See “Database Errors.”
You ARE the supervisor.

attwinmsg

This is a reminder for any supervisor who begins a supervisor alert.
You have not been called by extn.

attwinmsg

The Redial function has been selected when there has been no released
incoming call during this on-line session.
You must call beeper manually.

attwinmsg

This is not an on-line feature. Manually dial the beeper number on the console.
You must include a # somewhere in the label.

attwinmsg

Each attendant name or label must include the pound sign (#) for MCS
recognition.
You must transfer call manually.

attwinmsg

This transfer is not handled on-line. Manually dial the number on the console.
Your held party just hung up.

attwinmsg

A party who was on hold has hung up.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 163

PROCESS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page 164

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Chapter 12

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Introduction to Platform Management
When you enter the mcsadm login name, the MCS Platform Management Menu
displays with the options that are described below:

MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Erase Database Indexes
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [

]

Figure 12-1 Platform Management

Menu Options

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The MCS Platform Management Menu provides the following options described
below:
Backup Database

Makes a backup copy of database assignments on
tape; first in sequence of database options.

Create Database

Creates new database fields according to MCS
instructions.

Drop Database

Removes the entire MCS database. WARNING:
Do not use this option before backing up the
database on tape through the Backup Database
option.

Make Database Indexes

Recreates the order by which the database records
are stored.

Erase Database Indexes

Erases the order in which the database records are
stored and sorted.

Rebuild Database Indexes

Rebuilds the database indexes to improve
efficiency in database access and searches.

Set Menu Colors

Resets the color of all screens in the MCS and
related applications.

Table Record Count

Lists the internal MCS tables. For each, display a
count of its records.

Page 165

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Sequence of
Option Use

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

View Tty File

Displays what tty is tied to each attendant console
extension.

FLF/RCF Download to PBX

Restores patient extensions, phone service, DID
numbers, and patient restriction information to the
PBX if there is a PBX failure.

UNIX

Positions the cursor at the UNIX prompt. This option
is not explained further in this manual. Refer to a
UNIX reference guide.

In circumstances other than a response to a system failure, the sequence for database
options is as follows:
1. Back up the database.
2. Drop the database.
3. Create the database.
4. Use the Make Database Indexes option.
5. Using an Informix guide, retrieve the backup copy from the tape.

Warning

NEVER drop the database before backing it up, or the database will be lost.

Procedure
Action

At the login prompt, type mcsadm and
press Enter.

Result

The MCS Platform Management Menu
displays.

Refer to the following pages for
information and instructions for using each
menu option.
To exit the MCS Platform Management
The Login prompt redisplays.
Menu, type l (for Logout) and press Enter.

Page 166

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Backup Database Option
Use the Backup Database option on the MCS Platform Management Menu to store a
backup copy of the MCS database on tape.

MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Access Informix (dbaccess)
Backup Database
Create Database
Backup MCS Database
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Data will be ’unloaded’ to /oai/app/mcs/backup
Erase Database Indexes
Rebuild Database Indexes
Are you sure (y/n): y 
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
Please wait . . .
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ b ]
Press Enter to continue.

Figure 12-2 Backup Database

Delay

MCS must lock the database while this backup is being performed. No one can access
information in the database during this time. Therefore, we recommend that you
perform backups during low-traffic times only.

When to Use

This option should be used in the following three instances:
• To back up the basic MCS system after it has been installed and only relatively
permanent database and extension assignments have been made.
• Thereafter, when patients have been introduced to the system and many changes are
being made to the database, such as patient admissions or discharges and changes
to employee or physician extension assignments.
• Before every use of the Drop Database option.

Retrieval
If a back-up copy of the database must be retrieved (e.g., in the case of a system failure),
consult the Informix database retrieval procedures. The Backup MCS Database screen
names the full path and filename of the backup database stored for use with this
procedure.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 167

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The Backup MCS Database screen displays
type b at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
with important information about the
backup. (2)

Page 168

Write the time and date on the tape as
shown, and place a tape in the drive. To
perform the backup, type y at the prompt
and press Enter.

If a tape is in the tape drive, the backup is
performed. If not, the backup is cancelled.
In either case, the message “Press Enter to
continue” displays.

Press Enter.

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Create Database Option
Use the Create Database option on the MCS Platform Management Menu to create
new database fields according to MCS instructions.

MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Erase Database Indexes
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ c

Create MCS Database
Creating MCS database . . .

Press Enter to continue.

]

Figure 12-3 Create Database

When to Use

This option should only be used in the event of system failure or after using the Drop
Database option. Once the new database fields are created through this option, use the
Make Database Indexes option to identify the order in which the records in the
database are stored. Then, if desired, consult an Informix guide to retrieve data from
the backup tape that was made before you used the Drop Database option.

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The Create MCS Database screen displays
type c at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
while the database is being created. After
the database is created, the message “Press
Enter to continue” displays. (2)
Press Enter.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

Page 169

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Drop Database Option
Use the Drop Database option on the MCS Platform Management Menu to remove
the entire MCS database. WARNING: Do not use this option before backing up the
database on tape through the Backup Database option.

MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Dropping the
Erase Database Indexes
stored to be
Rebuild Database Indexes
Are you sure
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
Dropping MCS
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ d

]

Drop MCS Database
MCS database will cause all data currently
destroyed.
(y/n): y 

Database . . .

Press Enter to continue.

Figure 12-4 Drop Database

Sequence

The Drop MCS Database screen removes all data now stored in MCS, including all
extension user assignments for patients, physicians, employees, and internal locations.
Use the Backup Database option first to store a copy of the database on tape. Then,
drop the database with this option, create new database fields with the Create
Database option, identify the order of record storage with the Make Database Indexes
option, and retrieve the stored database copy from the tape.

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The Drop MCS Database screen displays
type d at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
with a warning and a confirmation prompt.
(2)
At the confirmation prompt, type y to delete If the deletion is confirmed, a message
the database or n to cancel the deletion, and shows when the database is being dropped.
press Enter.
The message “Press Enter to continue”
displays when you can exit the screen.
Press Enter.

Page 170

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Make Database Indexes Option
Use the Make Database Indexes option on the MCS Platform Management Menu to
recreate the order in which the database records are stored.

MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Make MCS Database Indexes
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Erase Database Indexes
Making MCS database indexes . . .
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ m

]

Press Enter to continue.

Figure 12-5 Make Database Indexes

Sequence

Once the Create Database option defines the fields of the new database according to
MCS instructions, the Make Database Indexes option marks the fields that are to be
used as indexes, setting the order in which records are stored and sorted during lookups.
After you use these two options, you can re-enter data to the database or retrieve data
from a backup tape.

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The Make MCS Database Indexes screen
type m at the prompt and press Enter. (1) displays while the database indexes are
being made. After the indexes are made, the
message “Press Enter to continue” displays.
(2)
Press Enter.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

Page 171

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Erase Database Indexes Option
Use the Erase Database Indexes option on the MCS Platform Management Menu to
erase the order in which the database records are stored and sorted.

MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
Erase MCS Database Indexes
Make Database Indexes
Erase Database Indexes
Erasing MCS database indexes . . .
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ e

]

Press Enter to continue.

Figure 12-6 Erase MCS Database Indexes

Sequence

Use of this option should be rare. Any time the Indexes are erased, you need to use the
Make Database Indexes option to re-make them.

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The Erase MCS Database Indexes screen
type e at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
displays and shows that the database
indexes are being erased. After the indexes
are erased the message “Press Enter to
continue” displays. (2)
Press Enter.

Page 172

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Rebuild Database Indexes Option
Use the Rebuild Database Indexes option on the MCS Platform Management Menu
to restructure the database indexes to improve efficiency in database access and
searches.

MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Erase Database Indexes
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout

Rebuild MCS Database Indexes

Rebuilding MCS database indexes . . .

Enter Option: [ r ]
Press Enter to continue.

Figure 12-7 Rebuild Database Indexes

When to Use

This option can be used anytime that operator lookups from the attendant screen seem
to be taking too long, lowering operator efficiency.

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The Rebuild MCS Database Indexes screen
type r at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
displays and shows that the database
indexes are being rebuilt. After the indexes
are rebuilt, the message “Press Enter to
continue” displays. (2)
Press Enter.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

Page 173

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Set Menu Colors Option
Use the Set Menu Colors option on the MCS Platform Management Menu to
reconfigure the color of all screens within the MCS.

MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
SCREEN
Make Database Indexes
SAMPLE
Erase Database Indexes
#1
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
(Data Entry
Table Record Count
View Tty File
Screen)
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout

(1)

(2)
COLOR

SCREEN
SAMPLE
#2

Title–fore:
Title–back:
Prompt Title–fore:
Prompt Title–back:
Prompts–fore:
Prompts–back:
Inputs–fore:
Inputs–back:
Input selected–fore:
Input selected–back:
Input message–fore:
Input message–back:
Options Title–fore:
Options Title–back:
Options–fore:
Options–back:
Options message–fore:
Options message–back:

(Menu)

Enter Option: [ s ]
SCREEN
SAMPLE
#3

SCREEN
SAMPLE
#4

(Operator

(Pop-Up

Functions)

Window)

SELECTION

Change

Next_pg

Prev_pg

Quit

Figure 12-8 Set Menu Colors

General
Process

This option brings great versatility to the process of “coloring” the MCS screens. For
the most part, every screen contains items, and the coloring of each item can be
controlled according to its foreground and its background. The item foreground is
typically the words that are displayed, such as a menu option, a prompt for data entry,
or a column title. The background of each item is simply a space around those words
that may or may not be visible, depending upon its color. If its color contrasts at all with
other adjacent screen item backgrounds, it is visible; if not, it is not visible.
Samples of MCS screens are shown on the left of screen (2) in Figure 12-8 and a multipage list of all MCS screen items is shown to the right. Each item is listed twice: Once
for its foreground color selection (fore) and again for its background color selection
(back). To the right of each item, a colored square displays the currently selected and
implemented color. When you move the cursor to an item, a row of colored squares
displays to the right of that item with an X on the current selection. Make changes to
the color of an item by using the arrow keys to move the X to a different color. As a
change is made to this right-hand item list, the corresponding sample screen(s) to the
left change(s).

Page 174

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Representative
Screens

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

The screens represented in Figure 12-8 are shown in more detail below with labels
marking the items from the right-hand list for which they demonstrate color changes:

)

Screen #1 in Figure 10-8
Data Entry

MCS

Prompt Title

Prompts

***

Patient Input

(e.g., Name, Ext.)
(Note:

Title

Time

Background

***

Name: xxx
Ext: xxx

Inputs

Room: xxx

Input selected (e.g. xxx )

(e.g., xxx)

Dsch: xxx

marked by

 to accept

Input message

Screen #2 in Figure 10-8
Menu

MCS

Time
*

Main Menu

Options Title

Operator

Option selected
Option key letter
(i.e., D, Q)

Database
Quit

Options (Note:
marked by

 to select

Options message

Att Status Title

Att

Call

Att Status

alr

bsy

Call Status Title
Call Status

NDA-30026 Revision 6

*

Title

Trnfr
D

MCS

MCS Status Title

On

MCS Status

Trnfr

Background
.)

Status Title

Trnfr Status

Page 175

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Screen #3 in Figure 10-8
Operator Function Screen
MCS

Special Dest

Time

Dest

Ext

Rm

Dest Title

John

3820

42

Mary
Jeff

3821
*3822

27
18

Destination
Selected Destination

Command selected

Dir

Prk

Command line (and)
Command key letter (in bold)

Pge

Source Title

Src

Ext

Rm

Source Info

Fred

3800

12

Att

Call

Trnfr

MCS

alr

bsy

D

On

(Note: Changes made to Title, Att Status Title, Att Status, Call Status Title, Call Status, Xfer Status
Title, Xfer Status, MCS Status Title, and MCS Status items in both foreground and background are also
reflected on this screen.)

Screen #4 in Figure 10-8
Pop–Up Windows

MCS

Time

Dest

Ext

Rm

John

3820
Msg Take
3821

42

3822
To: xxx
Dir Prk Pge
From: xxx

18

Mary
Jeff
Prompts pop up

27

Title pop up

Input pop up
Selected pop up

(Message pop up =Not Shown)

Src
Fred

Ext
Nxt
3800

Rm

Prv

12

Command chosen

Commands pop up
Cmd key pop up

(Note:

Att

Call

alr

bsy

Trnfr
D

(and)
(in bold)

MCS
On

Changes made to screen items on the Operator Function screen are reflected

in this screen, behind the pop-up window.)

Page 176

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Procedure

Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The Set Menu Colors screen displays. (2)
type s at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
Press Enter to select the Change
command.

Color choices display to the right of the first
screen item under the Color Selection
heading. The cursor and an X are positioned
on the current color selection.

Use the arrow keys or space bar to move the The screen(s) to the left on which the item
cursor and the X to the color you want and displays shows the change in color, and the
press Enter.
cursor is positioned on the next screen item
in the Color Selection list.
Make all desired changes to the foreground
and background of every MCS screen item,
as described above. Use Esc to return to the
first Color Selection page of items. Use the
Next-pg and Prev-pg commands to move
among the Color Selection pages of items.
When all changes are completed, type q and The MCS Platform Management Menu
press Enter to exit the Set Menu Colors
redisplays.
option.
On the Administration Main Menu, type m The menu colors screen displays. (2)
at the prompt and press Enter. (1)

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 177

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Table Record Count Option
Use the Table Record Count option on the MCS Platform Management Menu to list
the internal MCS tables and to display a count of the records each table contains.

(1)
MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Erase Database Indexes
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ t ]

(2)

MCS Database Table Record Count

attendant ............
beeper ...............
.

(6)
(257)

.
did_group ..............(5)
did_number ............ (0)
.
.
employee .............. (1022)
extension ............. (1865)
.
.
patient (758)
physician ............. (246)
.
.
Total number of records (6678)

Figure 12-9 Database Table Record Count

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The MCS Database Table Record Count
type t at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
screen displays. (2) After the listing, a total
number of records displays.
To exit the MCS Database Table Record
Count screen, press Enter.

Page 178

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

View TTY File Option
Use the View Tty File option on the MCS Platform Management Menu to display what
tty is associated with each attendant console extension.

(1)
MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Erase Database Indexes
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout

MCS Tty File

(2)
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10

3997
3996
3997
3997
3997
3997
3997
3997
3997

/dev/ttyn1a
/dev/tyn1b
/dev/ttyn1c
/dev/ttyn1d
/dev/ttyn1e
/dev/ttyn1f
/dev/tty01
/dev/ttyp06
/dev/ttyp07

Enter Option: [ v ]

Figure 12-10 View TTY File

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The MCS Tty File displays. (2)
type v at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
To exit the MCS Tty File display, press
Enter.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

Page 179

PLATFORM MANAGEMENT

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

FLF/RCF Download to PBX Option
Use the FLF/RCF Download to PBX option on the MCS Platform Management Menu
to restore PBX patient extensions, phone service, DID numbers, and patient restriction
information in the event of PBX failure.

(1)
MCS Platform Management Menu
Options
Backup Database
Create Database
Drop Database
Make Database Indexes
Erase Database Indexes
Rebuild Database Indexes
Set Menu Colors
Table Record Count
View Tty File
FLF/RCF Download to PBX
UNIX
Logout

(2)

FLF/RCF Download to PBX
Downloading will destroy moved
patients and reset staff restrictions
to default.
Are you sure (y/n): y 
Downloading . . .

Press Enter to continue.

Enter Option: [ f ]

Figure 12-11 FLF/RCF Download to PBX

Warning

Downloading will delete patients who have been moved and will reset all staff
restrictions to the default value.

DID Numbers

Only DID numbers that are stamped with an active status by the database are
downloaded to the PBX. When a DID number is active, it has been received by the PBX
and is implemented. If there was a patient move between the time that the DID number
was implemented by the PBX and the PBX failure, the downloaded DID number will
not be accurate.

Effect on
Database

Downloading the database to the PBX slows down response to operator lookups, but
not as much as backing up the database.

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Platform Management Menu, The FLF/RCF Download to PBX screen
type f at the prompt and press Enter. (1)
displays. (2)
To exit the FLF/RCF Download to PBX
screen, press Enter.

Page 180

The MCS Platform Management Menu
redisplays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual

Chapter 13

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Introduction
The MCS Host Interface Administration Menu provides options for managing the
communication interface between the MCS and the HIS systems. This menu displays
when you enter hostadm at the UNIX login prompt.

MCS Host Interface Administration Menu
Interface Status:

IdleVersion:

Asynchronous – 1.0

Options

View Log File
Erase Log File
Initialize Interface
Terminate Interface
Configuration
Statistics
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [

]

Figure 13-1 Host Interface Administration

Interface Status

The interface can either be idle or active. If it is idle, it is not able to receive messages
from the HIS. If it is active, the interface is receiving messages and is otherwise
interacting normally with the HIS. Administration Menu options can be accessed when
the interface is in either state.

Version

MCS now communicates only over a serial line in asynchronous mode.

NDA-30026

Revision 6

Page 181

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Menu Options

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

The Host Interface Administration Menu provides these menu options:

Option

Task

Section in Chapter

View Log File

Select and display the current message “Log File Options” on page 183
files that show activity on the host
interface.

Erase Log File

Remove the current log file from the
system.

“Log File Options” on page 183

Initialize Interface

Start up the host interface, allowing
communication between the MCS and
the HIS systems.

“Initialization and Termination
Options” on page 185

Terminate Interface

Stop host interface message exchange, “Initialization and Termination
discontinuing any communication
Options” on page 185
between the MCS and the HIS systems.

Configuration

Change or accept default configuration “Configuration Option” on page
values that govern communication
186
across the interface.

Statistics

Display any selected time-stamped file “Statistics Option” on page 189
containing statistics by category of
input.

Procedure
Action

Result

At the UNIX login, type hostadm and press The MCS Host Interface Administration
Enter.
Menu displays.
Refer to the following pages for
information and instructions in the use of
each menu option.
To exit the MCS Host Interface
Administration Menu, type l (for Logout)
and press Enter.

Page 182

The UNIX login prompt redisplays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Log File Options
The Log File options on the MCS Host Interface Administration Menu allow you to
display the log file for on-screen viewing or printing and to erase the contents of the log
file. This section discusses these two options.

MCS Host Interface Administration Menu
Interface Status: IdleVersion: Asynchronous – 1.0
MCS Host Interface Log Tue Aug 17 09:02 am
Options
View Log File
Erase Log File
BEGINNING OF DATA
Initialize Interface
Terminate Interface
08/16/08:45:10:Changing directories.
Configuration
08/16/08:45:11:Opening channel.
Statistics
08/16/08:56:25:ERR 100: open failed: dev /dev/ttynla, errno 13
UNIX
Logout
END OF DATA
Enter Option: [ v

]

Search

Top

Bottom

Command

Print

AutoScroll

Quit

Figure 13-2 Interface Log File

Contents

The Log File contains messages about processes completed, transactions in progress,
and other activities on the interface. The messages are date and time stamped
(e.g., 08/16/08:45:10) and listed in chronological order, based upon arrival to the log
file.

Real-Time
Display

The Log File display reflects real-time activity in the file when it is in AutoScroll
mode. When the cursor is positioned on the AutoScroll command, press the Enter key
to toggle the mode on and off. In AutoScroll mode, the notation A–S appears in the
bottom right-hand corner of the screen and new messages are scrolled onto the screen
as they occur.

Hard Copy Print

The Print command allows you to make hard-copy snapshots of either the current
screen or the entire file contents.

WARNING: Use of the Erase Log File option removes all data from the log file and
requires confirmation before the actual deletion is performed.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 183

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

View Log File
Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Host Interface Administration The Log File displays and the cursor is
Menu, type v at the prompt and press Enter. positioned on the AutoScroll command.(2)
(1)
If desired, press Enter to turn on the
AutoScroll mode.

The notation A–S displays in the bottom
right-hand corner of the screen.

Use the Top command to move to the
beginning of the display and the Bottom
command to move to the end of the display.
To Search the Display: Type s to select the
Search command and press Enter. At the
prompt, type the desired pattern and press
Enter.

All occurrences of the given pattern on that
page highlight.

To Print the Display: Type p to select the
Print command and press Enter. At the
There is a pause while the file or screen is
prompt, type f to print the whole file or s to sent to the printer. Then the command line
print the screen and press Enter. (Press Esc is returned.
to return the cursor to the command line,
cancelling the print request.)
To Work at UNIX Level: Select the
Command choice on the command line and The message “Enter UNIX command and
press Enter.
press Enter” displays, and the cursor is
positioned on a UNIX prompt.
To exit the display, type q to select the Quit The MCS Host Interface Administration
command and press Enter twice.
Menu displays.

Erase Log File
Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Host Interface Administration A message displayed under the Menu states
Menu, type e at the prompt and press Enter. that erasing the Log File will cause all data
(1)
in the log file to be deleted and requests
confirmation.
Type y and press Enter to delete the Log
The MCS Host Interface Administration
File and all data in it. Type n and press
Menu displays.
Enter to cancel the deletion. Press Enter a
second time.

Page 184

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Initialization and Termination Options
The Initialization and Termination options on the MCS Host Interface
Administration Menu are used to start and stop the host interface, controlling
communication between the MCS and the HIS systems.

MCS Host Interface Administration Menu
Interface Status: IdleVersion: Asynchronous – 1.0
Options
Erase Log File
Initialize Interface
Terminate Interface
Configuration
Statistics
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ i ]

Figure 13-3 Interface Initialization/Termination

Initialization
Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Host Interface Administration The message “Initialize Interface” displays
Menu, type i at the prompt and press Enter. to show that the interface has been
(1)
initialized as requested.
Press Enter.

The MCS Host Interface Administration
Menu displays.

Termination
Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Host Interface Administration The message “Terminate Interface, Are you
Menu, type t at the prompt and press Enter. sure (y/n):” displays for confirmation
(1)
before the termination is actually
performed.
Type y and press Enter to continue with the The message “Interface has been
termination. Type n and press Enter to
terminated” displays.
cancel the termination.
Press Enter.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The MCS Host Interface Administration
Menu displays.

Page 185

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Configuration Option
Use the Configuration option on the MCS Host Interface Administration Menu to
change or accept default configuration values which govern communication across the
interface.

MCS Host Interface Administration Menu
Interface Status: IdleVersion: Asynchronous – 1.0
MCS Host Interface Configuration

Options
View Log File
Erase Log File
Initialize Interface
Terminate Interface
Configuration
Statistics
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ c

Enter the new configuration value or just
press Enter to accept the current value.
Enter response time value (90 sec):

]

Figure 13-4 Interface Configuration File

Contents

Page 186

The Configuration File contains parameters for which entries bring the host and the
MCS into communication. In some cases, entries on one side of the link must be
compatible with entries on the other side of the link. The parameters display one at a
time for data entry with the default entry shown in parentheses.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Procedure
Action

Result

On the MCS Host Interface Administration The Configuration File displays. (2)
Menu, type c at the prompt and press Enter.
(1)
In each field, either press Enter to accept
the default value shown in parentheses or
type a new value to the field and press
Enter, according to the field definitions
below:
Field Name
Response timer value

Definition
The amount of time MCS waits for an
acknowledgment from HIS before
resending the requested data; default = 90
sec.

Master synchronization timer value (30
sec)

The length of time that HIS waits for an
acknowledgment or data-bearing message
from MCS before assuming that
communication is down between the two.

Slave synchronization timer value (180 sec) The length of time that MCS will wait for a
heartbeat or data-bearing message from the
host before assuming that communication
is down between the two.
Message request response timer value (30
sec)

In a two-way link, if MCS has asked the
host to download messages, this is the
amount of time that MCS waits for those
messages.

Host link semaphore key value

The key of the semaphore used to control
access to the host link; default = 2734.

Logging level

The level of detail at which information is
recorded in the log file; default = 1 (error
message only). Valid values include 1, 3, 5,
and 7, where 7 is extensive tracing that is
recommended for problem-solving only.

Host link shared memory key value

The semaphore key used to control access
to the host link shared memory; default =
2734.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Page 187

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Action

Result

Field Name
Number of times to send a negative
acknowledgment

Definition
The number of times MCS will send a
negative acknowledgment to the host
within the configured response time period
before it stops sending one; default = 3.

Host interface working directory

The full path and filename of the host
interface working directory; default = /oai/
app/mcs/host/bin.

Logging and statistics directory

The full path and filename of the directory
for the logging and statistical files; default
= /oai/app/mcs/host/log.

Modem dial out telephone number ( )

The telephone number used to establish
connection with the HIS system if the host
interface is connected by modem.

Slave TTY port device

The name of the port device on the MCS
designated terminal; default = /dev/ttynla.

Line mode

The line mode and speed, to match that of
the host, from the selection displayed above
the entry field; default = 1 (9600B, 8-N-1).
After the last field, press Enter, the
message “Update Completed” displays.

Press Enter.

Page 188

The MCS Host Interface Administration
Menu displays.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Statistics Option
Use the Statistics option on the MCS Host Interface Administration Menu to display
any selected time-stamped file containing statistics by category of input.

MCS Host Interface Administration Menu
Interface Status: Idle
Version: Asynchronous – 1.0
Host Statistics Files

Options

07.31–09:52
View Log File
Erase Log File
Initialize Interface
Terminate Interface
Configuration
Statistics
UNIX
Logout
Enter Option: [ s

08.01–10:25

/oai/app/mcs/host/log/07.31–09:52
BEGINNING

OF

Tue Aug

17

09:02 am

DATA

MCS Host Interface Statistics
Last Report: 07/27/12:31:56
Current Time: 07/31/09:52:20

]

CASE NAME – NUMBER
Preadmit with Testing – 01:
Newborn Admission – 02:
Routine Admission – 03:
Preadmit with Testing Admission – 04:
Emergency Room Registration – 05:
Nonrecurring Outpatient Registration – 06:

NUMBER
5
3
45
0
37
32

RECEIVED

MORE
Search

Top

Bottom

Command

Print

AutoScroll

Quit

Figure 13-5 Interface Statistics

Display
Contents

The fields in the display (e.g., Preadmit with Testing, Newborn Admission, etc.) are
derived from the types of records that are sent from the host and defined for the host
during its installation. The APM automatically opens new host statistics files and then
removes them after one week.

Real-Time
Display

The Statistics display reflects real-time activity in the file when it is in AutoScroll
mode. When the cursor is positioned on the AutoScroll command, press the Enter key
to toggle the mode on and off. In AutoScroll mode, the notation A–S appears in the
bottom right-hand corner of the screen and new messages are scrolled onto the screen
as they occur. These new messages are appended to the file.
Note:

Hardcopy Print

NDA-30026 Revision 6

The Current Time and Last Report notations show when the respective reports (i.e.
last and current) are generated.

The Print command enables you to make hardcopy snapshots of either the current
screen or the entire file contents.

Page 189

HOST INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Page 190

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Appendix A

BEEPER INTERFACE

Overview
This section specifies the features and basic operation of NEC’s Medical
Controller System alphanumeric paging interface. The MCS offers multiple
databases that can be used to make and join callers to hospital staff and services.
The MCS Beeper Interface (MCS/BI) will provide the operator with a facility to
search the MCS database, select a specific individual or service, and enter an
alphanumeric message that can be sent to an electronic paging device (beeper)
through an alphanumeric paging terminal. Access to voice pagers will not be
provided.
The communications protocol between the MCS and the alphanumeric paging
terminal will be that recommended by the Personal Communications Industry
Association, Telocator. The protocol was previously known as the Motorola/IXO
alphanumeric protocol. The Motorola/IXO protocol was adopted by Telocator in
September of 1988 as an industry standard for devices accepting input for paging
requests and is known as Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP).
The preferred access method to the paging terminal is through a serial I/O
connection. The MCS/BI will also support connection through a modem to a
remote paging device. A beeper configuration menu will allow the input of a
modem access number, response timers, and other control parameters.
A list of pre-defined messages that are commonly sent can be accessed by the
operator. The operator can also enter a specific message at the input prompt when
required. The pre-defined messages can be modified.
A time stamped record of each page will be saved to a log. This log can be viewed
and printed to a line printer.

Database Fields

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Two fields in the MCS database contain pager number information. The Pager Id
field defines a person’s pager address or Personal ID Number (PIN). The second
field, Pager Dial Number, is a phone number field that is used to dial a user’s
paging provider or to access a pager that has a discrete phone number. If the
database contains a dial number, that number will be used to place a call from the
ATT Console. If the database only contains a pager id, the local paging system will
be accessed if the MCS Beeper Interface is installed and active.

Appendix Page 1

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Architecture
This section provides information about the architecture of the beeper interface in
order to give you a basic understanding how the beeper interface operates.
The following diagram depicts connectivity between the NEAX2400, the MCS,
and a Hospital Information System (HIS). A brief explanation of the connections
is provided below.

MCS
HIS
Interface

)

UAP

MCS
Interface

))

NEAX
2400

OAI

Hospital
Information
System

Att
Console

Paging
Terminal

Figure A-1 Beeper Connectivity

The OAI link is either X.25 or TCP/IP. The HIS interface is an RS-232C DTE-toDTE full-duplex connection or a TCP/IP network interface. The connection
between the UAP and Attendant Consoles varies on the type of console equipment.
For example, the SunRiver VGA stations require DB-9 with pins 2 and 4 not used.
The connection from the UAP out to the Paging System is an RS-232C DTE. In
most cases one of the COM ports of the UAP can be used, otherwise, a port from
a multi-port serial I/O card will be required. (The SunRiver stations have serial and
parallel ports.) The paging terminal can be any device that can be interfaced using
an RS-232C and accept the Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP) for paging
requests.
NEC developed a beeper interface that can accept beeper request from a number of
application users within the UAP. The beeper software interface can be used by
both the MCS and other OAI applications (i.e. Dterm applications) concurrently.
The beeper interface accepts IPC message from applications and communicates
with the beeper terminal on the RS-232 connection.

Appendix Page 2

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

))

)

A basic diagram of the beeper software interface is presented below. The diagram
shows some of the basic UNIX internal’s that will be required to process a message
from an OAI application to the beeper terminal. The diagram might not be an
accurate representation of the actual software interface since some of the details
have been left out.

Beeper Interface
Paging
Terminal
OAI
Apps

NEC defined
message format

Beeper
Interface
Software
IPC
Queues

COM Port
RS-232
TAP
message
format

Figure A-2 Beeper Software Interface

The NEC defined message format can be provided to other application engineers
upon request. The message format contains information that allows the beeper
interface software to accept messages from unknown applications and return
beeper status information to the application after the beeper request has been
serviced by the beeper terminal.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Appendix Page 3

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Using the Beeper Interface
To launch the Beeper function, press B on the console keyboard or use the arrow
keys to select the Beeper command and press Enter while the main operator menu
is displayed. (All operator functions are launched from the main menu.) The
command line is replaced with a prompt for you to enter the name of the person to
receive a beeper page.

Medical Center System
Destination Name

DirAsst

Park

Source Name

Ext

Rtrv

Beeper
Ext

Attendant Status

ATT2
DID

DID

Room Bed Unit

Redial

Emerg

Clear

Room Bed Unit

Call Status

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am
Age Sx Admit Dsch

Age Sx Admit Dsch

Trnfr
D

Quit

S

MCS Status
On-Line

Figure A-3 Console Screen

Enter the name of the person to receive the page, and press Enter. If you press
Enter without typing characters at the Enter Name prompt, the MCS attempts to
select all of the names in the database that have a beeper number assigned.
Currently, Physician and Employee records are the only records that contain a
beeper number field.It is suggested that you enter at least one character of the name
to be paged in order to limit the length of the database search.
An example of the results of a database look-up is shown in Figure A-4 on page 5.

Appendix Page 4

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Medical Center System
Person
BAKER, JOHN, L.
BATENA, BETTY
BAWATER, NICHOLAS
Bottom

ATT2
Pager Id
27010
10345
00123

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am
Pager Dial Number
91800-759-7243

Enter Person to Beep: BA
Up/Down Arrows to move,  to select,  to quit
Source Name

Ext

Attendant Status

DID

Room Bed Unit

Call Status

Age Sx Admit Dsch

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-Line

Figure A-4 Database Beeper Number Display

If more than one record is selected from the database, you must use the arrow keys
to highlight the proper entry. To select the entry, press Enter. To return to the Enter
Person prompt where you can change or add letters to the name look-up, type the
desired character.
If the selected entry does not contain a dial number (e.g., Betty Batena in the
example above), a screen similar to the one displayed in Figure A-5 on page 6
appears. The MCS processing of this type of call event is described in “Local Pager
Process” on page 6.
If the selected entry does contain a dial number (e.g., John Baker in the example
above), the MCS attempts to dial the number displayed in the pager dial number
field. The processing of this type of call event is described in “Dial Number
Process” on page 8.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Appendix Page 5

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Local Pager
Process

Local pager records are those that have a pager ID but do not have a dial number.
If you selected a local pager from the display list, follow the information provided
in this section. For information about records that contain a dial number, see “Dial
Number Process” on page 8.
The local page feature requires a connection to a local paging terminal system and
interface software. If the paging system interface software is not installed or not
active, an error message displays in the Attendant Status field at the bottom of the
screen when you attempt to use this option.
Figure A-5 below illustrates the Pager Message screen that appears after you select
a local pager record from the look-up screen illustrated in Figure A-4 on page 5.

Medical Center System
Person
BAKER, JOHN, L.
BATENA, BETTY
BAWATER, NICHOLAS
Bottom
Page Name:
Pager Id:
Text Message:

ATT2
Pager Id
27010
10345
*** Pager
Message ***
00123

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am
Pager Dial Number
91800-759-7243
Call Operator
Code BLUE
Code RED
Code YELLOW
Code WHITE
Call Patient
Call Office

BATENA, BETTY
10345

Enter Person to Beep: BA
Up/Down Arrows to move,  to select,  to quit
Source Name

Ext

Attendant Status

DID

Room Bed Unit

Call Status

Age Sx Admit Dsch

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-Line

Figure A-5 Local Pager Message Screen

From the Pager Message pop-up screen, you can enter a text message to be sent to
the displayed pager entry.
You can enter your own message or select site definable canned message text or
both. To display a list of canned message text as illustrated in Figure A-5, expand
the display. You can usually expand the display by pressing Tab. To scroll through
the list, press any of the following keys: Tab, Space Bar, UpArrow, and
DownArrow. Press Enter to select the highlighted message. To exit the input
screens and return to the Enter Person to Beep prompt, press Esc. Pressing almost
any other key (e.g., BackSpace or Delete) returns you to the Text Message prompt.
From the Text Message prompt, press Enter to accept the current text message.

Appendix Page 6

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

A beeper interface message is sent to the local beeper interface. If the interface is
not accepting messages, an error message will display at the bottom of the Pager
Message screen.

Medical Center System
Person
BAKER, JOHN, L.
BATENA, BETTY
BAWATER, NICHOLAS
Bottom
Page Name:
Pager Id:
Text Message:

ATT2
Pager Id
27010
10345
*** Pager
Message ***
00123

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am
Pager Dial Number
91800-759-7243

BATENA, BETTY
10345
555-1212
Waiting for confirmation response... _

Enter Person to Beep: BA
Up/Down Arrows to move,  to select,  to quit
Source Name

Attendant Status

Ext

DID

Room Bed Unit

Call Status

Age Sx Admit Dsch

Trnfr
D

S

MCS Status
On-Line

Figure A-6 Pager Message Error

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Appendix Page 7

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Dial Number
Process

This section describes the processing of a database entry that contains a dial
number. If you selected an entry that contain a dial number from the display list
illustrated in Figure A-4 on page 5, follow the information provided in this section.
For information about records that do not contain a dial number, see “Local Pager
Process” on page 6.
An entry that has a dial number can also have a pager id. This dial number feature
has been kept for customers that currently use it. The MCS will attempt to place a
call from the ATT console using the NEAX2400 OAI make call command. The
number should contain the required access code data, etc., to place a call as if it
were being dialed manually from the ATT console.
After placing a call, the MCS queries the beeper code table of the database. If there
are any codes in the table, a list of these beeper codes display. (See Figure A-7.)
The beeper code entries consist of a description field and a numeric code field.
These numeric codes can be used to describe an event to the person being paged.
You can use the commands listed at the bottom of the scroll window to move
within the beeper code display.

Medical Center System
Top of File

ATT2

Tue Aug 17 09:02 am

*** Beeper Codes ***
Beeper Code
Beeper Code Name
******************************************************************************
4444
6666
99977

BOSKY, FRANK - CALL OFFICE
BOSKY, FRANK - CALL HOSPITAL
BLUE, CODE
End of File

UpPage

DownPage
Source Name

Search
Ext

Attendant Status

Top

DID

Bottom

Print

Room Bed Unit

Call Status

Age Sx Admit Dsch

Trnfr
D

Quit

S

MCS Status
On-Line

Figure A-7 Beeper Codes Screen

You will need to complete the rest of the paging process manually. Some WideArea paging systems require a Personal Id Number (PIN) to identify the person to
receive the page. After you enter a PIN, you must enter a numeric code. These steps
are separated by either tones or voice prompts.
After placing the call and displaying the beeper code screen you can return to the
main operations menu by pressing Esc. If the MCS is unable to place the call an
error message will display in the Call Status field at the bottom of the screen.

Appendix Page 8

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Error and User
Interface
Messages

This section contains a list of error messages that might appear during some beeper
operations.
• Beeper Interface Not Installed - The beeper interface software that would
handle the communications between UAP Applications and the local beeper
terminal is either not installed or has not been installed properly.
• Beeper Interface Offline - The beeper terminal is not communicating with the
beeper interface software or in not active. First check that the beeper interface
is active, then check the physical connection between the UAP’s
communication port and the beeper terminal’s communication port. If the error
continues to occur, check the beeper interface configuration, and ensure that the
communication device port is accurate.
• Queue Status Error [x] - While attempting to send an IPC message to the beeper
interface, a message queue error occurred. The value [x] is the system error that
occurred. This error occurs very infrequently. However, in the event that this
error does occur, take note of the error number, and contact the site technician.
Restarting the beeper interface and/or the MCS menu process should correct
this error condition.
• Unable to send beeper message - The MCS menu process was unable to send
an IPC message to the beeper interface. This error is usually a result of the
beeper interface terminating abnormally. Make sure that the beeper interface
software is active. If the software is active, this message indicates that other
message interface problems are occurring in the system. Check the APM error
log.
• Failure: Timed Out - The MCS menu process timed-out waiting for a response
from the beeper interface software. If the beeper interface appears to be active
and this message occurs frequently, you need to increase the response timer.
• Failure: Out-of-service - The beeper interface timed-out waiting for an
acknowledgment from the beeper terminal. If the beeper terminal appears to be
functioning properly and the error occurs frequently, you need to increase the
response timer between the beeper interface software and the beeper terminal.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Appendix Page 9

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Interface
Configuration

A special UNIX user account, bpradm, allows access to configurable interface
data. This section presents most of the screens that you might need to access during
installation and support of the interface.

Main Menu
After logging into the UNIX system with the user account name bpradm, the
following menu displays.

Beeper Interface Administration Menu
Interface Status: Active Version: 1.0
Options
View Log File
Erase Log File
Initialize Interface
Terminate Interface
Configuration
UNIX
Logout

Figure A-8 Beeper Interface Administration Menu

In the figure above, the interface status is active. When the status is active, you can
start and stop the interface from this menu as well as view some of the log files and
set the interface configurable data.

Appendix Page 10

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Configuration
Menu

Selecting Configuration displays the following menu of options:

Interface Configuration Menu

Modify Configuration Files
Modify Misc Parameters
Modify Port Parameters
Modify Timer Parameters
Save Configuration
Quit to Main Menu
Enter Option: [ ]

Figure A-9 Configuration Menu

Valid commands or options are indicated by the bold underlined letters. Each
option is discussed in detail below.

Configuration Files
To modify the configuration files enter “C” at the Enter Option prompt. All the
configuration files, will be displayed as shown in the following window:

Enter transaction log file name
(/oai/app/beeper/log/trans.log) :
Enter beeper log file name
(/oai/app/beeper/log/beeper.log) :
Enter fifo device name
(/oai/app/beeper/beeper.fifo) :
Enter beeperq executable name
(/oai/app/beeper/bin/beeperq) :
Enter beeperq log file name
(/oai/app/beeper/log/beeperrq.log) :
Enter beeperq qkey filename
(oai/app/beeper/cfg/config) :

Figure A-10 Configuration Files

You will rarely need to change this information. These files indicate the location
of configuration data.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Appendix Page 11

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Once the configuration file update is complete, you will be returned to the
Configuration Main Menu.

Miscellaneous Parameters
To modify the miscellaneous parameters enter “M” at the Enter Option prompt.
The window shown below will be displayed. Once you have entered the parameters
you will be returned to the Configuration Main Menu.

Enter log level value (9) :
Enter modem dial number ():
Enter pager name (PGI) :
Enter pager password (000000):

Figure A-11 Misc Parameters Window

These miscellaneous parameters are vendor specific. In most cases the default
values should work.

Appendix Page 12

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Port Parameters
To modify the port parameters enter “P” at the Enter Option prompt. The window
shown below will be displayed.

Enter serial port device name (/dev/tty2a) :
(9600-8-e-1)
Enter Speed of port (9600) :
Enter Data size (8/7) of port (8) :
Enter Parity (n/o/e) of port (e) :
Enter Stop Bits of port (1) :

Figure A-12 Port Parameters Window

The port parameters are also vendor specific. In most cases the default values
should work. Once you have entered the parameters you will be returned to the
Configuration Main Menu.

Timer Parameters
To modify the timer parameters enter “T” at the Enter Option prompt. The timer
parameters, will be displayed as shown in the window below.

Enter cr wait timer value (2 sec) :
Enter ID wait timer value (10 sec) :
Enter transaction wait timer value (10 sec):
Enter send wait timer value (30 sec) :
Enter cr retry value (5 times) :
Enter transaction retry valu (3 times) :

Figure A-13 Timer Parameters Window

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Appendix Page 13

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

The timer parameters relate to the TAP message format. These timing variables
might require coordination with the vendor specific beeper terminal data. Once you
have entered the parameters you will be returned to the Configuration Main
Menu.

Viewing Transaction Log Files
You can view the current transaction log by selecting View Log File option from
the main screen. Three log files are saved by the beeper interface: One traces
transaction messages between OAI application and the beeper interface, a second
traces transaction messages between the beeper interface and the beeper terminal
interface, and the third is a transaction only file. The third transaction log file will
contain the results of each beeper request received by the interface. The disposition
of each request is logged in this file - success or failure. Below is an illustration of
the View Log File Menu:

View Log File Menu
View Beeper Log File
View BeeperQ Log File
View Beeper Transaction Log File
Main Menu

Enter Option: [ ]

Figure A-14 View Log File Menu

Appendix Page 14

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

Select the log file that you want to view. A screen similar to the following displays.
You can use PgUp and PgDn as well as command line options that are listed across
the bottom of the display. These options are described below:

Beeper Transaction Log
BEGINNING OF DATA
08/10-14:24:35
08/10-16:11:56
08/11-13:07:52
END OF DATA

Search

Tue Aug 22 1

REPLY COMPLETE [ :No error ]
REPLY COMPLETE [ :No error ]
REPLY COMPLETE [ :No error ]

Top

Bottom

Command

Print

AutoScroll

Figure A-15 Beeper Transaction Log

The AutoScroll feature allows you to view the file in real-time. As new messages
are received, they display at the bottom of the screen. The other command line
options allow you to move within the file, print a screen display or the complete
file, or execute an external UNIX command.

NDA-30026 Revision 6

Appendix Page 15

Medical Center System Operations Manual - JAVA Edition

This Page Left Blank.

Appendix Page 16

NDA-30026 Revision 6



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 218
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:30 08:38:10-06:00
Creation Date                   : 2000:08:30 16:30:40Z
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:30 08:38:10-06:00
Create Date                     : 2000:08:30 16:30:40Z
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:30 08:38:10-06:00
Title                           : MCS Operations Manual (Java Edition)
Creator                         : EZ Manuals
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu